Kia 2019 Sportage Owner Manual

Kia 2019 Sportage Owner Manual
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehicles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all trims of this vehicle and includes images,
descriptions, and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, some material in this manual may not be applicable
to your specific Kia vehicle. Some images are shown for illustration
only and may show features that differ from those on your vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replacement parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
i
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2018 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Canada Inc..
Printed in Korea
table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Audio system
5
Driving your vehicle
6
What to do in an emergency
7
Maintenance
8
Specifications & Consumer information
9
Index
I
ii
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-7
1
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about features, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has 9 sections
plus an index. Each section begins
with a brief list of contents so you
can tell at a glance if that section has
the information you want.
1 2
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this
manual. These WARNINGs were prepared to enhance your personal safety.You should carefully read and follow
ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
Introduction
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 15% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results.
Methanol may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
3. Gasohol containing more than
15% ethanol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 15%.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems
caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
✽ NOTICE
Never use any fuel containing
methanol. Discontinue use of any
methanol containing product which
may inhibit proper drivability.
1 3
Introduction
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene
(Fe), and Other metalic additives,
may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, clogging, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
1 4
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
✽ NOTICE
Your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty may not cover damage to
the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by
the use of fuels containing methanol
or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives Such as
MMT(Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does not
recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT. This type of fuel can
reduce vehicle performance and affect
your emission control system. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
Introduction
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website www.toptiergas.com
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
not available, one bottle of additive
should be added to the fuel tank at
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. In other
words they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the
“Reducing the risk of a rollover”
driving guidelines, in chapter 6 of
this manual.
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you
may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
1 6
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
1 7
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view
1. Hood......................................................4-43
2. Head lamp (Features of your vehicle) ...4-119
Head lamp (Maintenance).....................8-78
3. Front fog lamp
(Features of your vehicle).....................4-124
Front fog lamp (Maintenance) ...............8-78
4. Wheel and tire................................8-44, 9-4
5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-65
6. Panorama sunroof .................................4-48
7. Front windshield wiper blades
(Features of your vehicle)....................4-126
Front windshield wiper blades
(Maintenance) .......................................8-39
8. Windows ................................................4-38
9. Parking assist system .........................4-113
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OQL015001
2 2
Your vehicle at a glance
■ Rear view
1. Door locks .............................................4-22
2. Fuel filler lid ...........................................4-45
3. Rear combination lamp (Maintenance) ..8-79
4. High mounted stop lamp (Maintenance)...8-79
5. Liftgate .........................................4-26, 4-28
6. Antenna ...................................................5-2
7. Rearview camera ................................4-118
8. Parking assist system (Rear) ...4-109, 4-113
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OQL015002L
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle ...................................4-23
2. Power window switch...............................4-38
3. Central door lock switch ..........................4-24
4. Power window lock button .......................4-41
5. Outside rearview mirror control ...............4-66
6. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-67
7. Instrument panel illumination control ......4-70
8. BSD On/Off button...................................6-73
9. LDWS On/Off button................................6-80
10. ESC off button .......................................6-44
11. Power liftgate open/close button ...........4-28
12. Steering wheel.......................................4-54
13. Tilt and telescopic steering control
lever........................................................4-55
14. Inner fuse panel.....................................8-60
15. Brake pedal............................................6-28
16. Parking brake pedal...............................6-30
17. Hood release lever.................................4-43
18. Seat..........................................................3-4
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OQLA015005
2 4
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Steering wheel audio controls ...............5-2
2. Driver`s front air bag ...........................3-58
3. Horn.....................................................4-57
4. Instrument cluster................................4-69
5. Wiper and washer control lever .........4-126
6. Ignition switch ........................................6-6
Engine start/stop button ........................6-9
7. Cruise control ......................................6-66
8. Audio .....................................................5-7
9. Hazard warning flasher .........................7-2
10. Manual climate control system........4-135
Automatic climate control system....4-145
11. Shift lever A/T ....................................6-13
12. Seat warmer ....................................4-166
Air ventilation seat ...........................4-167
13. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-56
14. Smart phone wireless charger ........4-170
15. Drive mode button .............................6-70
16. AWD Lock button...............................6-20
17. DBC button........................................6-62
18. Electronic parking brake (EPB) switch..6-31
19. Auto Hold On/Off button ....................6-38
20. Parking assist system On/Off button...4-113
21. Center console storage box ............4-162
22. USB charger....................................4-169
23. Power outlet.....................................4-168
24. Glove box ........................................4-162
25. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-58
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OQL015004L
2 5
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ THETA 2.4 GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................8-28
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................8-26
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................8-31
4. Air cleaner.........................................8-34
■ THETA 2.0 T-GDI
5. Fuse box ...........................................8-62
6. Negative battery terminal..................8-41
7. Positive battery terminal ...................8-41
8. Engine oil dipstick .............................8-25
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....8-32
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
2 6
OQLE075095/OQLA075109
Safety features of your vehicle
Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Always wear your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Restrain all children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Air bag hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Driver distraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Control your speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
• Keep your vehicle in safe condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Front seat adjustment - manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Child restraint system (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
• Children Always in the Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
• Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . . 3-33
• Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS). . . . . . . . 3-36
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• How does the air bag system operate? . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of
the air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
• Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3
Safety features of your vehicle
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air
bags, ALWAYS make sure you and
your passengers wear your seat
belts, and wear them properly.
3 2
Restrain all children
Driver distraction
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers.
Safety should be the first concern
when behind the wheel and drivers
need to be aware of the wide array of
potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating,
personal grooming, other passengers, and using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile
devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones,
navigation units, etc.) when your
vehicle is parked or safely stopped.
Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Safety features of your vehicle
• ONLY use your mobile device
when allowed by laws and when
conditions permit safe use. NEVER
text or email while driving. Most
countries have laws prohibiting
drivers from texting. Some countries and cities also prohibit drivers
from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving.
You have a responsibility to your
passengers and others on the road
to always drive safely, with your
hands on the wheel as well as your
eyes and attention on the road.
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of
such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and
perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
3 3
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT
Front seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward /
backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumbar support* (Driver`s seat)
(5) Headrest
Rear seat
(6) Seatback angle and folding
(7) Headrest
(8) Armrest
* : if equipped
OQL035001
3 4
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the driver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING - Driver responsibility for passengers
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impacting you or other passengers.
1KMN3662
The driver must advise the passengers to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against the seatback could
result in serious or fatal injury
in a sudden stop or collision.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable control of the your vehicle. A distance of at least 250 mm (10 in)
from your chest to the steering
wheel is recommended. Failure
to do so can result in air bag
inflation injuries to the driver.
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sitting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
3 5
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
Always lock the rear seatback
before driving. Failure to do so
could result in passengers or
objects being thrown forward
injuring vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Luggage and
Cargo
Do not stack pile or stack luggage or cargo higher than the
seatback in the cargo area. In an
accident the cargo could strike
and injury a passenger. If
objects are large, heavy or must
be piled, they must be secured
in the cargo area.
WARNING - Cargo Area
Do not allow passengers to ride
in the cargo area under any circumstance. The cargo area is
solely for the purpose of transporting luggage or cargo.
3 6
WARNING - Unexpected
Seat Movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING - Small
Objects
Use extreme caution when picking up small objects trapped
under the seats or between the
seat and the center console.
Your hands might be cut or
injured by the sharp edges of
the seats mechanism.
Feature of Seat Leather
• Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes
through a special process to be
available for use. Since it is a natural substance, each part differs in
thickness or density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature and
humidity.
• The seat is made of stretchable
fabric to improve comfort.
Safety features of your vehicle
• The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driving
comfort and stability.
• Wrinkles may appear naturally
from usage. It is not a fault of the
product.
Front seat adjustment - manual
Seatback angle
Forward and backward
CAUTION
• Wrinkles or abrasions which
appear naturally from usage
are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside
the back pocket may damage
the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could
bleach may contaminate the
surface of the seat covering
fabric.
OQLA035003
OQLA035002
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)
3 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
WARNING
NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
WARNING - Seating
Position
To reduce the risk of injury in a
crash, both drivers and passengers should always sit as far
back as possible in the upright
position with the seatbelt properly secured.
3 8
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat height
OQLA035004
To change the height of the seat, push
the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
Safety features of your vehicle
Lumbar support (if equipped)
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so you can easily control the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
WARNING - Unattended
OQLA035067
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.
children
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
CAUTION - Power seat
adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equipment.
CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor or
electrical components.
When in operation, the power seatconsumes a large amount of electrical power. To prevent unnecessary
system drain, don’t adjust the power
seat longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
3 9
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Seatback angle
Seat height
OQLA035006
OQLA035007
OQLA035008
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or press down to
lower the front part of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or press down
to lower the seat cushion. Release
the switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
3 10
Safety features of your vehicle
Lumbar support
Headrest (for front seat)
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
WARNING - Headrest
OQLA035009
OQLC035090
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle.
3 11
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
Removal and reinstallation
■ Type A
OYFH034205
OQLA035010
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
✽ NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
OQLA035012
■ Type B
CAUTION
Excessive pulling or pushing
may damage the headrest.
OQLA035013
3 12
Safety features of your vehicle
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1) or switch(1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.
■ Type A
WARNING - Headrest
Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
WARNING - Headrest
OQLA035014
■ Type B
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
OQLA035015
3 13
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback pocket
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's heads is similar with
the height as the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest
OQL035016
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
3 14
OQLC035087
The rear seat is equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
WARNING - Headrest
Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
OQLA035018
OQLA035096
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and reinstallation
(if equipped)
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (1) while pulling the
headrest upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the
headrest poles (3) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1).
Then adjust it to the appropriate
height and ensure that it locks in
position.
3 15
Safety features of your vehicle
Armrest
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING
OQL035020
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating
position and no seat belts are
available for use. Ignoring this
warning could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.
3 16
OQLA035021
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position.
Safety features of your vehicle
OQL035030
OQL035023
OQL035024
4. Lift up the front portion of the seatback folding lever, then fold the
seat toward the front of the vehicle.
When you return the seatback to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and push
the seatback rearward by lifting up
the front portion of the folding lever.
Push the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
OQLA035022
3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
3 17
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Rear
Seatback
When returning the rear seat to
the upright position:
• Be careful not to damage the
seat belt webbing or buckle.
• Ensure the seatback is completely locked into its upright
position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
Failure to adhere to any of
these instructions could
result in serious injury or
death in the event of a crash.
3 18
CAUTION - Damaging
rear seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seatback, insert the buckle between
the rear seatback and cushion.
Doing so can prevent the buckle
from being damaged by the rear
seatback.
When returning the rear seatbacks to
the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to their
proper position.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly protect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING - Shoulder Belt
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt cannot protect the occupant in a
crash.
• Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the webbing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of
the belt across the abdominal area
must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
3 19
Safety features of your vehicle
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
would either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the seat
belt repeatedly while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.
3 20
WARNING - Seat belt
Seat belt warning
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
1GQA2083
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate pursuant to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in “ON” position.
Safety features of your vehicle
Conditions
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Unbuckled
Buckled
Below 5km/h
(3mph)
Buckled → 5km/h (3mph) ~
Unbuckled 10km/h (6mph)
Above 10km/h
(6mph)
Above 10km/h
Unbuckled (6mph) → Below
5km/h (3mph)
Warning Pattern
LightBlink
ChimeSound
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
6 seconds
6 seconds
None
6 seconds
None
6 seconds
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
6 seconds *1
↓
Stop *2
*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds. If
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the
light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
B200A02NF
B180A01NF-1
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible “click” when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽ NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
3 21
Safety features of your vehicle
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
Improperly positioned seat belts can
cause serious injuries in an accident.
Front seat
Rear center seatbelt
WARNING - Shoulder belt
OQL035031
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
3 22
OQLE035071
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of
another collision.
To fasten your seatbelt:
1. Extract the tongue plate (A) from
the hole on the belt assembly
cover.
Safety features of your vehicle
OQL035072
OQL035073
OQLE035027
2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
buckle (A’) until an audible “click"
is heard, indicating the latch is
locked. Make sure the belt is not
twisted.
3. Pull out the tongue plate (B) from
the pocket (C).
4. Pull the tongue plate (B) and
insert it into the buckle (B’) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating
the latch is locked. Make sure the
belt is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
3 23
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
safety belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
OQL035074
OQL035027
To release your seatbelt:
1. Press the release button on the
buckle (B’) and remove the tongue
plate (B).
OQL035028
2. Insert the tongue plate (B) into the
pocket (C)
3. To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the tongue plate into the
web release hole (A'). Pull up on
the seat belt web and allow the
webbing to retract automatically.
3 24
Safety features of your vehicle
Stowing the rear seat belt
OQL035071
OQL035030
4. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
hole on the belt assembly cover.
• The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when
not in use.
• The center seat belt can be stowed
with the plate and webbing rolled in
the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion.
• Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides
will help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
OQL035029
3 25
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Take the seatbelt out of the seatbelt guide prior to using it. If you
pull the seat belt when it is
stored in the guides, it may
damage the guides and/or the
belt webbing.
OXMA033101
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor may
lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate
and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.
3 26
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD
(Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal collisions.
If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt. (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE - without rollover
sensor
The pre-tensioner will activate not
only in a frontal collision but also in a
side collision, if the vehicle is equipped
with a side or curtain air bag.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Skin Irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
ODMESA2024
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
✽ NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner system may be activated not only in
certain frontal collision, but also in
certain side collisions or rollovers.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light
on
the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Front retractor pre-tensioner
assembly
(3) SRS control module
(4) Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
3 27
Safety features of your vehicle
If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
is not working properly, this warning
light will illuminate even if there is not
a malfunction with the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt
and SRS air bag system as soon as
possible.
✽ NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt system in
any manner. Do not attempt to
inspect or replace the pre-tensioner
seat belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
3 28
✽ NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
WARNING - Hot pretensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pretensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use of
these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
✽ NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that meets
the Safety Standards of your country.
Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets the Safety
Standards of your country. The
restraint must be appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
Check the label on the child restraint
for this information. Refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips as low as possible. Check periodically to insure that
the belt fits. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children
are given the most safety in the event
of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child
(over age 12) must be seated in the
front seat, the child should be
securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should
be placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat. NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint system. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face.
3 29
Safety features of your vehicle
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
3 30
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
Safety features of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
WARNING - Pinched seat
belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing/
buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
3 31
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Children Always in the Rear
WARNING - Restraint
Location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating airbag
and seriously injured.
WARNING - Hot Child
Restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
3 32
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat. Even
with air bags, children can be seriously injured or killed. Children too large
for a child restraint must use the seat
belts provided.
Most countries have child restraint
laws which require children to travel
in approved child restraint devices.
The laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among countries, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system in the rear seats of the vehicle.
Safety features of your vehicle
Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
WARNING
- Child Restraint Installation
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of serious injury or death in an
accident. Always take the following precautions when using
a child restraint system:
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a Kia
dealer check the child restraint
system, seat belts, tether
anchors and lower anchors.
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets the Safety
Standards of your country.
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight. The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this information.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
3 33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Holding
Children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
3 34
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle. The car can heat up
very quickly, resulting in injuries
to the child in the vehicle.
WARNING - Seat Belt Use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.
Safety features of your vehicle
CRS09
Rear-facing child seats
A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The
harness system holds the child in
place, and in an accident, acts to
keep the child positioned in the seat
and reduces the stress to the neck
and spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant
child restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats
typically have higher height and
weight limits for the rear-facing position, allowing you to keep your child
rear-facing for a longer period of time.
Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufacturer. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.
OQLA035032
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child’s body with a
harness. Keep children in a forwardfacing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-facing child restraint, your child
is ready for a booster seat.
3 35
Safety features of your vehicle
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat
until they are big enough to sit in the
seat without a booster and still have
the seat belt fit properly. For a seat
belt to fit properly, the lap belt must
lie snugly across the upper thighs,
not the stomach. The shoulder belt
should lie snug across the shoulder
and chest and not across the neck or
face. Children under age 13 must
always ride in the rear seats and
must always be properly restrained
to minimize the risk of injury.
3 36
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
• Properly secure the child
restraint to the vehicle. All child
restraints must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt or with the
LATCH system.
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufacturer instructions.
Safety features of your vehicle
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) System
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an
accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attachments for the LATCH lower anchors.
WARNING - LATCH Lower
Anchors
Never attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center
seating position. LATCH lower
anchors are only to be used in
the left and right rear outboard
seating positions. You may damage the anchors or the anchors
may fail and break in a collision.
OQLC035035
LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There are
no LATCH anchors provided for the
center rear seating position.
3 37
Safety features of your vehicle
OQL035036
The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
To use the lower anchor, push the
upper portion of the lower anchor
cover.
❈ (1) : Lower Anchor position indicator
(2) : Lower Anchor
3 38
Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the
child restraint and the lower
anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the
vehicle seat, then attach the seat
to the lower anchors according to
the instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions for properly adjusting and
tightening the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower
anchors.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around their
neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized Kia dealer after an accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may
not properly secure the child
restraint.
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat
with "Tether Anchor" system
OQLA035033
First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint system top tether
anchorages are located on the back
of the rear seatbacks.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single tether anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the correct tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or harnesses, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
• Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure
to do so may result in child
strangulation.
OQLA035034
To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether
strap over the child restraint seatback. Route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts, or route
the tether strap over the top of the
vehicle seatback. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the tether anchor, then tighten the
tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions to
firmly secure the child restraint to
the seat.
3 39
Safety features of your vehicle
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1.Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/ shoulder belt around or through the child
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat forward and from side-to-side.
Securing a child restraint with a
lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.
OLMB033044
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the “Automatic Locking”
mode to secure a child restraint.
The “Automatic Locking” mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
3 40
Safety features of your vehicle
OEN036101
OEN036102
OEN036103
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.
Position the release button so that
it is easy to access in case of an
emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the "Automatic
Locking" (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" mode. If no distinct sound
is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
3 41
Safety features of your vehicle
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.
3 42
✽ NOTICE
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system. If the
retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your
vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Side air bag
Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OQLA035085
3 43
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate?
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• In normal conditions, the airbag is
designed to deploy based on certain angle and intensity of the collision. These two factors are crucial
elements for deciding whether to
transmit airbag deployment signal
or start the electrical operation or
not.
• The airbag will deploy based on
angle and intensity of the collision.
It will not deploy in every crash or
collision situations
3 44
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected curtain
air bags will remain inflated longer
to help provide protection from
ejection, especially when used in
conjunction with the seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Airbag inflation
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A distance
of at least 25 cm (10 in) from
your chest to the steering wheel
is recommended. Failure to do
so can result in airbag inflation
injuries to the driver.
Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING - Hot components
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag inflation. The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING
Do not install or place any
accessories near air bag
deployment areas, such as the
instrument panel, windows, pillars, and roof rails. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles if the air bag deploys.
3 45
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
WARNING - Air bag
Air bag warning light
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or curtain air bags could impact the
child.
W7-147
1JBH3051
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger air
bag inflates, it could cause serious or
fatal injuries to the child.
3 46
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
10.Side pressure sensors
11. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
12. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
13. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
14. Emergency Fastening
Device(EFD)
W7-147
OQLA035099
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Roll over sensor*
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
*: if equipped
If the air bag warning light is illuminated for more than 6 seconds after
the ignition is turned on, or of it illuminates during vehicle operation, an
SRS component may not be functioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
3 47
Safety features of your vehicle
If any of the following conditions
occur, this indicates a malfunction in
the air bag system. Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
3 48
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Driver’s front air bag (2)
B240B01L
B240B02L
The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (3)
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
B240B03L
A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
B240B05L
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehicle. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the air
bag deploys.
• If an air bag deploys, there may be
a loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in
this fine powder. The dust generated during air bag deployment may
cause skin or eye irritation as well
as aggravate asthma for some persons. Always wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly with cold
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags were
deployed.
3 49
Safety features of your vehicle
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driving,
the SRS is not working properly. If
this occurs, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition switch.
Never remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Failure
to heed this warning will cause the
SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.
3 50
Occupant Detection System
(ODS)
■ Type A
OQLA035060
■ Type B
OQLA035101
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Detection System.
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag
indicator.
Safety features of your vehicle
Main components of the occupant detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which determines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicates the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system
determines to be of appropriate size,
and he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off
and the front passenger's air bag will
be able to inflate, if necessary, in
frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended, feet on the
floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection
by the air bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
3 51
Safety features of your vehicle
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by the
"PASSENGER
SRS warning
occupant classification system AIR BAG OFF"
light
indicator light
Devices
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult*1
Off
Off
Activated
2. Child restraint system with
child under 12 months old
*2 *3 *4
On
Off
Deactivated
3. Unoccupied
On
Off
Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system
Off
On
Activated
*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.
*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has
outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above
12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front
passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
3 52
CAUTION
• Do not install a child restraint
seat in the passenger seat
when the seat is heavily
soaked with any type of liquid.
• Do not alter or remodel the
ODS (Occupant Detection
System). This may damage the
system and prevent it from
functioning properly in a collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Do not use car seat cushions that
cover up the surface of the seat
and aftermarket manufactured
passenger seat heaters.
• After conducting car interior
cleaning using steam or detergent,
the seat should be dried properly.
Afterward, check for normal
operation of the “PASS AIR BAG
“OFF”” and air bag warning
lights.
• Any service related to the passenger seat and the ODS must be
done ata Kia service center.
• After the passenger seat has been
removed or installed for repair
purposes, check for normal operation of the “PASS AIR BAG
“OFF” and air bag warning lights
with a person seated or not seated
in the passenger seat.
WARNING
When the passenger is not sitting properly in the passenger
seat, or some items are placed
on or under the passenger seat,
it may interfere with normal
operation of the ODS (Occupant
Detection System). In order for
the driver and all passengers to
receive maximum benefit from
the airbag and seat belt system,
all persons should seat and
wear the seat belt properly.
✽ NOTICE
When the “PASS AIR BAG “OFF””
symbol is illuminated, the passenger
air bag system will not operate. The
passenger air bag system will operate when necessary if the symbol is
not illuminated.
✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blanket, front seat cover or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
3 53
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - ODS System
(Continued)
(Continued)
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System and may
result in the deactivation of the
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
OJFA035105
OJFA035107
- Do not place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OJFA035106
OJFA035108
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
(Continued)
- Never place feet on the dashboard.
(Continued)
OJFA035104
- Do not place a heavy loads in
the front passenger seatback
pocket or on the front passenger seat.
(Continued)
3 54
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
(Continued)
OQLA035100
- Do not use car seat accessories such as thick blankets
and cushions which cover up
the car seat surface.
(Continued)
(Continued)
OJFA035109
- Never lean on the door or center console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
OJFA035102
- Do not put an electronic
device (ex. Laptop computer,
after market DMB, navigation,
satellite audio, video game
machine, MP3, AC inverter,
etc.) in the front passenger
seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
3 55
Safety features of your vehicle
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.
Proper position
(Continued)
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OJFA035103
B990A01O
- Wet Passenger Seat:
Do not spill liquid in the passenger seat. Spilled liquid on
the passenger seat may cause
the air bag warning light to illuminate or malfunction. If any
liquid is spilled, make sure the
seat has been completely dried
before driving the vehicle.
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
3 56
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator
is
illuminated,
because the air bag will not
deploy in the event of a crash.
The driver must instruct the
passenger to reposition himself
in the seat. Failure to properly
position yourself may lead to air
bag deactivation resulting in air
bag non-deployment in a collision. If the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator remains
illuminated after the passenger
repositions themselves properly and the car is restarted, it is
recommended that passenger
move to the rear seat because
the passenger's front air bag
will not deploy.
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
• Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupant detection system,
never install a child restraint system
in the front passenger's seat. A
deploying air bag can forcefully strike
a child resulting in serious injuries or
death. Any child age 12 and under
should ride in the rear seat. Children
too large for child restraints should
use the available lap/shoulder belts.
No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when
restrained in the rear seat.
• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated when the
front passenger's seat is occupied
by an adult and he/she sits properly
(sitting upright with the seatback in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), have that person
sit in the rear seat.
Any child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large for
child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what
type of crash, children of all ages are
safer when restrained in the rear seat.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate because the passenger's front air bag is connected with
the occupant detection system. If
there is a malfunction of the occupant
detection system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front air
bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the
front passenger's seat.
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
■ Driver’s front air bag
OQL035038
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OQL035039
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.
3 57
Safety features of your vehicle
The indication of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG" located on the air bag pad cover on the
steering wheel and the passenger's
side front panel pad above the glove
box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.
3 58
These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instrument panel in low severity collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
chapter.
Modification to the seat structure can
cause the air bag to deploy at a different level than should be provided.
Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifications to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle's advanced air bag
system. That contact is Kia's toll-free
Customer Experience Department at
1-877-KIA-AUTO (1-877-542-2886).
However, Kia does not endorse nor
will it support any changes to any
part or structure of the vehicle that
could affect the advanced air bag
system, including the occupant
detection system.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Replacement /
modifications
The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized Kia dealer using original
Kia parts designed for this vehicle and model. Any other such
replacement or modification
could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection
system and your advanced air
bags.
Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in
frontal crashes.
✽ NOTICE
Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized Kia dealer
replace the air bag immediately
after deployment.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. However, when
frontal deployment threshold is satisfied at side-impact, front air bags
may deploy. In addition, front air bags
will not deploy in frontal crashes
below the deployment threshold.
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box. Such
objects could cause harm if
the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the
air bags to deploy.
• Never place or insert any
object into any small opening
near side airbag labels
attached to the vehicle seats.
When the air bag deploys, the
object may affect the deployment and result in unexpected
accident or bodily harm.
3 59
Safety features of your vehicle
Side air bag
OQL035061
OQL035041
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat.
3 60
The purpose of the air bag is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt alone.
• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity impact. However, when
side deployment threshold is satisfied at front-impact, side air bags
may deploy.
• The side air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or
rollover situations.
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unexpected deployment of the side
air bag.
• The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's
seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your
seat belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in operation.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel at
the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side air bag as
this may affect the deployment
of the side air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
• If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. Inform the dealer that your vehicle is equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection system.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Never place or insert any
object into any small opening
near side airbag labels
attached to the vehicle seats.
When the air bag deploys, the
object may affect the deployment and result in unexpected
accident or bodily harm.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
Curtain air bag
OQLA035042
OQLA035043
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
3 61
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from ejecting out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seatbelts are also in use.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity impact. However, when
side deployment threshold is satisfied at front-impact, curtain air bags
may deploy.
• The curtain air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact.
• Also, the curtain air bags on both
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact or rollover situations.
3 62
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies against the
doors, put their arms on the doors,
stretch their arms out of the window
or place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side
impact and/or curtain air bags.
✽ NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any components of the side and curtain air
bag system. This should only be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front
and rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the coat hook.
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second
or third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
OQLA035044/OQL035045/OQL035046/OQL035047/OQL035048/OQLA035059
(1) SRS control module/
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (Front Door)
(4) Side impact sensor (C-pillar)
(5) Side impact sensor (B-pillar)
❈ The actual air bag collision sensors in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3 63
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Air bag sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious personal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
3 64
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due
to the deformation of the front
bumper, front end module, body or
front doors where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replacing a
bumper (or front door module) with
non-genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
OQLA035049
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the impact of the front collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
OQLA035050
OQL035041
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Side and/or curtain air bags
Side and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the impact resulting
from a side impact collision.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other types
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors. Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indicate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, including when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed.
Even where side and/or curtain air
bags would not provide impact protection in a rollover, however, they
will deploy to prevent ejection of
occupants, especially those who are
restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
3 65
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
OQLA035052
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.
3 66
OQLA035053
OQL035054
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occupant protection.
Safety features of your vehicle
1VQA2089
OQL035055
OQL035083
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” collisions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in all
rollover accidents where the
SRSCM indicates that the front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
3 67
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have
your vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
OQL035056
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area
and the full force of the impact is not
delivered to the sensors.
3 68
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one which
has been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning label
OQLA035057
WARNING - Towing Vehicle
Always have the ignition off
when your vehicle is being
towed. The side air bags may
inflate if the vehicle is tilted
such as when being towed
because of the rollover sensors
in the vehicle.
OQLA035058
Air bag warning labels, some
required by the Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),
are attached to the sunvisor to alert
the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
3 69
Features of your vehicle
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Liftgate (for manual liftgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
• Opening the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Closing the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Smart Power Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-22
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-23
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Electronic power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Trip modes (Trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
• Digital speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• LDWS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-109
• Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Operation of the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Non-operational conditions of parking assist system. . 4-115
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• High Beam Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Check headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-125
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Liftgate room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Headlight (Headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Two types of luggage board use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
4
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
4
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Air ventilation seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
• USB charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Wireless smart phone charging system . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Floor mat anchor (s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
Features of your vehicle
FOLDING KEY
Record your key number
The key code number is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe place,
but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
WARNING - Aftermarket
OJF045002
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold automatically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
key
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used,
the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage
to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.
4 5
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children. Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with a manual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
4 6
Door Lock (1)
Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
liftgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
✽ NOTICE
OXMA043317
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and liftgate will lock. The
hazard warning lights will blink
once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
Liftgate unlock (3)
The liftgate is unlocked if the button
is pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will be locked
automatically.
• For Power Liftgate Only:
The Power Liftgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the liftgate is
opened and then closed, the liftgate
will be locked again automatically.
For detailed information refer to the
"Power liftgate" in this chapter.
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warning lights flash for about 27 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
0.5 second. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button on the transmitter.
Transmitter precautions
• The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
- The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating distance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio substation or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation of
the transmitter.
4 7
Features of your vehicle
• When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your mobile phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
always try to maintain an adequate
distance between the two devices.
4 8
CAUTION - Transmitter
Battery replacement
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not function properly.
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
OYDDCO2005
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is positioned correctly.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
Features of your vehicle
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Kia dealer for transmitter
reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
•
An inappropriately disposed battery can be
harmful to the environment
and may cause harm to
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmitter to heat or sunlight.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry
Canada
licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
verifies if the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
4 9
Features of your vehicle
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere
in your vehicle.Your Immobilizer password is a customer unique password
and should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere in
your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
4 10
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Limp home (override) procedure
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON position, if the immobilizer
indicator (
) goes off after blinking 5 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of
order. You cannot start the engine
without the limp home procedure. To
start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch. Your password is only available from an authorized Kia dealership. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
The following procedure is how to
input your password of “2345” as an
example.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. The immobilizer indicator
(
) will blink 5 times and go off
indicating the beginning of the limp
home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
3. To enter the first digit (in this example “2”), turn the ignition switch to
the ON and ACC position twice.
Perform the same procedure for
the next digits between 3 seconds
and 10 seconds (for example, for
“3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC
3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input
successfully, you have to start the
engine within 30 seconds. If you
attempt to start the engine after 30
seconds, the engine will not start
and you will have to input your
password again.
After performing the limp home procedure, you have to see an authorized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
or immobilizer system.
4 11
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the bar
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys
easily. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the code number and keep it in a
safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Liftgate) and start
the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
Smart key function
WARNING - Ignition key
OUM045428MX
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
4 12
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children. Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with a manual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
OYDDCO2004
✽ NOTICE
OQL045001
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 ~ 1 m
(28 ~ 40 in.) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the liftgate is
open.
4 13
Features of your vehicle
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the liftgate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽ NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 ~ 1 m
(28 ~ 40 in.) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7 ~ 1m (28 ~ 40 in.)
from the front outside door handle,
other people can also open the
doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door
or all doors, the door(s) will lock
automatically unless the door is
opened.
4 14
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the liftgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽ NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Liftgate unlocking
Using the liftgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the liftgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will lock
automatically.
✽ NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 ~ 1m (28
~ 40 in.) from the liftgate handle.
Features of your vehicle
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the liftgate unlock button (3)
for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
• For Power Liftgate Only:
The Power Liftgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the liftgate is
opened and then closed, the liftgate
will be locked again automatically.
Panic
1. Press the panic button (4) for more
than 1 second.
2. The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 27
seconds.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key.
❈ For detailed information refer to
the “Engine start/stop button” in
chapter 6.
✽ NOTICE
To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the smart key.
❈ For detailed information refer to
the "Power liftgate" in this chapter.
4 15
Features of your vehicle
Loss of the smart key
Smart key precautions
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the
engine. You should immediately take
the vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehicle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cellular phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cellular phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is active
such as making a call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the smart key and your cellular
phone or smart phone in the same
pants or jacket pocket and maintain
adequate distance between the two
devices.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not function properly.
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
4 16
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
OUM045427MX
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is in the correct position.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
•
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sunlight, or it will be damaged.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry
Canada
licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
4 17
Features of your vehicle
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it verifies if the smart key is valid
or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key.
In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
4 18
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Armed stage
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and liftgate) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system (or
smart key) or ignition key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
(for smart key, the chime also
sounds) once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door (or liftgate) or engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights and the chime will not
operate and the theft-alarm will not
arm. If all doors and liftgate and
engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warning lights blink once.
The system can also be armed by
locking the doors with the key from
the front doors; however, the hazard
warning lights will not blink using this
method.
✽ NOTICE
The theft-alarm system can be deactivated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
4 19
Features of your vehicle
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s) leave
the vehicle. If any door (or liftgate
) or engine hood is opened within
30 seconds after the system
enters the armed stage, the system is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
4 20
Theft-alarm stage
Disarmed stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without using the ignition key or transmitter (or smart key).
• The liftgate is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds, and
repeat the horn 3 times unless the
system is disarmed. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the ignition key or transmitter (or smart key).
The system will be disarmed when
• The doors (and liftgate) are
unlocked with the transmitter (or
smart key) or the ignition key.
After depressing the unlock button,
the hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound twice (in
smart key) to indicate that the system is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if
any door (or liftgate) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key
into the ignition switch, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position
and wait for 30 seconds. Then the
system will be disarmed.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, press the engine
start/stop button with smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Adjusting
alarm system
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifications to the theft-alarm system are
not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.
4 21
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
OQL045002
■ Type C
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the
front of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with a key, all vehicle doors will
lock/unlock automatically.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽ NOTICE
OQLE045066
To remove the cover (For Type C):
1. Pull out the door handle.
2. Press the lever (1) located inside
the bottom part of the cover with a
key or flat-head screwdriver.
3. Push out the cover while pressing
the lever.
4 22
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
WARNING
• Securely close your door
before you begin driving.
Failure to fully close your door
may cause it to open during
vehicle operation.
• Keep your body out of the way
of the closing door to prevent
injuries.
WARNING
If people must spend a longer
time in the vehicle while it is
very hot or cold outside, there
is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people in it.
CAUTION
Do not open and close the door
repeatedly if unnecessary or
with excessive force. Such
action can damage the vehicle
door.
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s
(or front passenger’s) door is pulled
when the door lock button is in the
lock position, the button will unlock
and the door will open. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
• Doors cannot be locked if the smart
key is in the vehicle and an door is
open.
OQL045003
• To lock a door without the key,
push the inside door lock button (1)
or central door lock switch (2) to
the “Lock” position when the ignition switch is in the OFF position
and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.
✽ NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows, and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
OQL045004
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position.
The red mark on the button will be
visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the
door is locked properly, the red mark
on the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(2) outward.
If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try one
or more of the following techniques to
exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on
the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
WARNING
Do not pull the inner door handle
of driver’s(or passenger’s) door
while the vehicle is moving.
4 23
Features of your vehicle
With central door lock switch
■ Driver side
• When pressing the left portion(2)
for driver side or the lower portion(2) for passenger side of the
switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or
if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the right
portion(1) for driver side or upper
portion(1) for passenger side of the
central door lock switch is pressed.
OQL045005
■ Passenger side
OQLA045511
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the right portion(1)
for driver side or the upper portion(1) for passenger side of the
switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
4 24
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the
door.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a
door when something is
approaching can cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unattended
children/animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock
system
Child-protector rear door lock
In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.
Speed sensing door lock system
All doors will automatically lock after
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h
(10 mph).
✽ NOTICE
You can select some auto door
lock/unlock features in “User
Settings”.
For more information, refer to
“User Settings” in this chapter.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle until
the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
OQL045006
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Turn the child safety lock (1) located on the rear edge of the door to
the lock ( ) position. When the
child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open
even when the inner door handle
is pulled.
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is moving, they may fall
out.
4 25
Features of your vehicle
LIFTGATE (for manual liftgate)
The liftgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the liftgate.
Opening the liftgate
Closing the liftgate
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
OQL045007
• The liftgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the liftgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the liftgate is unlocked if the
liftgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed (if equipped). Once
the liftgate is opened and then
closed, the liftgate is locked automatically.
4 26
CAUTION - Liftgate lift
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.
OQL045008
To close the liftgate, lower and push
down the liftgate firmly. Make sure
that the liftgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the liftgate.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
Driving with the liftgate open is
not
advisable.
Dangerous
exhaust fumes can enter the
passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the liftgate
opened, keep the air vents and
all windows open so that additional outside air can enter.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints
are
available.
Occupants should always be
properly restrained.
Emergency liftgate safety
release
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time. The cargo
area is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OQL045009
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency liftgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the liftgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area, the liftgate can be opened by pushing the
release lever and pushing open the
liftgate.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the
liftgate latch and striker while
closing the liftgate. It may damage the liftgate's latch.
4 27
Features of your vehicle
POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Power liftgate open / close button
(2) Power liftgate handle switch
(3) Power liftgate close button
✽ NOTICE
OQL045010L
If IGN is ON, the power liftgate
operates when :
• Automatic shift lever is in P
(Park).
WARNING - Unattended
OQL045011L
OQL045012L
4 28
children/pets
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might operate the power liftgate in such a
way that could result in injury to
themselves or others or damage to the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power liftgate may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
✽ NOTICE
Do not attach heavy objects to the
power liftgate when you operate the
power liftgate additional. Weight on
liftgate could cause damages to the
system.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
liftgate manually during automatic operation. This may cause
damage to the power liftgate or
to the vehicle.
If it is necessary to close or
open the power liftgate manually when the battery is discharged or disconnected, make
sure the liftgate is not in operation. Switch the power liftgate to
the off position. Do not apply
excessive force.
Opening the liftgate
OQL045010
OQLA045512
The power liftgate will open automatically by doing one of the following:
• Press and hold the liftgate unlock
button on the transmitter or smart
key until power liftgate operates.
• While power liftgate operating, you
can stop it if you shortly press the
unlock button on the transmitter or
smart key.
• Press the power liftgate open/close
button for approximately one second.
• For emergency stop while power
liftgate operating, press the power
liftgate open/close button shortly.
4 29
Features of your vehicle
• For emergency stop while power
liftgate operating, press the power
liftgate open/close button shortly.
Closing the liftgate
OQL045011
OQL045010
• Press the liftgate handle switch
carrying the smart key with you.
Power liftgate non-opening conditions
The power liftgate will not open automatically, when the vehicle is moving
more than 3km/h (2mph) or the automatic shift lever is not in P(Park) position.
✽ NOTICE
The chime will sound continuously if
you drive over 3km/h (2mph) with the
liftgate opened. Stop your vehicle at a
safe place as soon as possible to check
if your liftgate is opened.
OQLA045512
• Press the power liftgate close button for approximately one second
when the liftgate is opened.
The liftgate will close and lock
automatically.
4 30
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the liftgate
before opening or closing the
power liftgate. Wait until the liftgate is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not operate the power liftgate more than 5 times continuously.
It may damage the power liftgate
system. If you operate the power
liftgate more than 5 times continuously, the chime will sound 3
times and the power liftgate will
not operate. At this time, stop
operating the liftgate and leave it
for more than 1 minute.
✽ NOTICE
• The power liftgate can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However the power liftgate operation consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being discharged,
do not operate it excessively.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
liftgate in the open position for a
long time.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power liftgate by yourself.
This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power liftgate.
This could cause the power liftgate
to operate improperly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In cold and wet climates, the
power liftgate may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• It is recommended to wait until
the power liftgate is fully closed
before starting the vehicle. The
power liftgate may not close fully
if the vehicle is started during
automatic closing.
4 31
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
However, if the resistance is weak
such as from an object that is thin or
soft, or the liftgate is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and
reversal may not detect the resistance.
If the automatic reversal feature
operates continuously more than
twice during opening or closing operation, the power liftgate may stop at
that position. At this time, close the
liftgate manually and operate the liftgate automatically again.
OQL045013
During power opening and closing if
the power liftgate is blocked by an
object or part of the body, the power
liftgate will detect the resistance.
• If the resistance is detected while
opening the liftgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
• If the resistance is detected while
closing the liftgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
4 32
WARNING
Never place any object or part of
your body in the path of the
power liftgate as it is operating.
Doing so could result in personal
injury or damage to the vehicle.
Never operate power liftgate
attached with any heavy objects
(ex. Bicycles). It could damage
the power liftgate.
How to reset the power liftgate
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, for the
power liftgate to operate normally,
reset the power liftgate as follows:
1. Put the automatic shift lever in P
(Park).
2. While pressing the liftgate close
button, press the liftgate handle
switch for more than 3 seconds.
(the chime will sound)
3. Close the liftgate manually.
If the power liftgate does not work
properly after the above procedure,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If the power liftgate does not operate
normally, first check the following
condition before using the power
liftgate.
Make sure the automatic shift lever
is in P (Park).
Power liftgate opening height
user setting
Smart Power Liftgate
(if equipped)
OQL045012
OQL045016
The driver may set the height of a
fully opened liftgate by following the
below instruction.
1. Position the liftgate manually to
the height you prefer.
2. Press the liftgate close button for
more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the liftgate manually after
hearing the buzzer sound.
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the liftgate can be opened using
the Smart Power Liftgate system.
The liftgate will open to the height
the driver has set up.
4 33
Features of your vehicle
How to use the Smart Power
Liftgate
The liftgate can be opened with notouch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
• The Smart Power Liftgate does
not operate when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is continuously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and within 1.5
m (60 inches) from the front door
handles. (for vehicles equipped
with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
4 34
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Power Liftgate,
go to User Settings Mode and select
Smart Power Liftgate on the LCD
display.
❈ For more information, refer to
the "LCD Display" section in
this chapter.
OQL045017
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (50 ~100 cm (20~40 inches)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the liftgate
will open.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area
if you do not want the liftgate to
open. If you have unintentionally
entered the detecting area and the
hazard warning lights and chime
starts to operate, leave the detecting
area with the smart key. The liftgate
will stay closed.
OQLA045018
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the liftgate will open.
Make sure you close the liftgate
before driving your vehicle.
Make sure there are no people or
objects around the liftgate before
opening or closing the liftgate. Make
sure objects in the liftgate do not
come out when opening the liftgate
on a slope. It may cause serious
injury. Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Power Liftgate when washing
your vehicle. Otherwise, the liftgate
may open inadvertently. The key
should be kept out of reach of children. Children may inadvertently
open the Smart Power Liftgate while
playing around the rear area of the
vehicle.
CAUTION - Liftgate lift
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.
4 35
Features of your vehicle
How to deactivate the Smart
Power Liftgate function using the
smart key
OXM043001
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Liftgate open
4. Panic
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Power Liftgate function will be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Power Liftgate
function for emergency situations.
4 36
✽ NOTICE
• If you press the door unlock button (2), the Smart Power Liftgate
function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open
any door for 30 seconds, the smart
power liftgate function will be
activated again.
• If you press the liftgate open button (3) for more than 1 second, the
liftgate opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or liftgate open button (3) when
the Smart Power Liftgate function
is not in the Detect and Alert stage,
the smart power liftgate function
will not be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Power Liftgate function by
pressing the smart key button and
opened a door, the smart power
liftgate function can be activated
again by closing and locking all
doors.
Detecting area
OQL045063C
• The Smart Power Liftgate operates
with a welcome alert if the smart
key is detected within 50~100 cm
(20~40 inches) from the liftgate.
• The alert stops once the smart key
is positioned outside the detecting
area during the Detect and Alert
stage.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The Smart Power Liftgate function
will not work if any of the following
occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope
or unpaved road, etc.
4 37
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
■ Front
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down (Driver's window)
(7) Power window lock button
■ Rear
In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
OQL045072C
4 38
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the operation of rear seat windows. The
power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
If the front doors are opened; however, the power windows cannot be
operated even within the 30 second
period.
If the window cannot be close
because it is blocked by objects,
remove the objects and close the
window.
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately 2.5 cm. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
WARNING
Do not install any accessories
in the vehicle that extend into
the open window area. Such
objects will impact the proper
function of the Automatic reversal “jam protection” feature
described on page 4-40 of this
manual.
Window opening and closing
OQL045022
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
4 39
Features of your vehicle
Auto up/down window
(Driver's window)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver's and passenger's
window and continue pulling up
the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.
OUN026013
OQL045021
Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
or raises the window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window
at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press
down and release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
4 40
Automatic reversal
(for Auto up/down window)
If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
Features of your vehicle
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
WARNING
Power window lock button
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 4 mm
(0.16 in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and
will not stop and reverse direction.
OQL045023
WARNING
The automatic reverse feature
doesn’t activate while resetting
befor power window system.
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear seat
doors by pressing the power window lock button located on the driver’s door to the LOCK position
(pressed).
• When the power window lock
button is pressed :
- The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
4 41
Features of your vehicle
- The rear passenger's control can
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
CAUTION - Opening /closing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
4 42
WARNING - Power windows
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock button
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
• Do not extend a face or arms
outside through the window
opening while driving.
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood
OQL045024
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position
and setting the parking brake.
OQL045025
OQL045047
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the secondary latch (1) upward inside of the
hood center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood.
4. Pull out the stay rod.
5. Hold the hood opened with the
stay rod (1).
WARNING - Stay Rod
• To prevent from being burned
by hot metal, grab the stay rod
in the area wrapped in rubber.
• Ensure the stay rod is completely inserted into the hole
provided whenever you inspect
the engine compartment. This
will prevent the hood from
falling and possibly injuring
you.
4 43
Features of your vehicle
Hood open warning
Closing the hood
OQLE045129
The warning message will appear on
the LCD display when hood is open.
The warning chime will operate when
the vehicle is being driven at or
above 3km/h with the hood open.
4 44
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be
removed from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3.Lower the hood until it is about 30
cm above the closed position and
let it drop. Make sure that it locks
into place.
4. Check that the hood has engaged
properly. If the hood can be raised
slightly, it is not properly engaged.
Open it again and close it with a little more force.
CAUTION - Hood obstruction
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an
accident.
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks” once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
✽ NOTICE
OQL045027
OQL045046
1. To open the fuel filler lid, press the
3 o`clock position edge of the fuel
filler lid.
✽ NOTICE
The fuel filler lid will open when
driver doors is unlocked.
2. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
3. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.
4. Place the cap on the fuel filler lid.
There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs normally with the OBD system.
✽ NOTICE
When refueling on unlevel ground,
the fuel gauge may not point to the F
position.
It is not a malfunction. If you move
your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel
gauge will move to the full position.
4 45
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
WARNING - Fire/explo-
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before completely removing the cap. If
pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
sion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility. Failure to follow all warnings
may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks once,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator
light will illuminate.
4 46
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or
fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,
etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must reenter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place
the container on the ground prior
to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be
maintained until the filling is complete. Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
WARNING - Refueling &
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the “Fuel requirements”
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control system.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
4 47
Features of your vehicle
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
To prevent damage to the sunroof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
OQL045028
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
However, if the front door is opened,
the sunroof cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
4 48
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
WARNING - Roof cargo
Do not operate the sun roof
while using the roof rack to
transport cargo. This may cause
the cargo to come loose and
distract the driver.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
Sunshade
Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is opened, rain
or snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
WARNING
To avoid accidental injury, do
not let children operate the sunroof without adult supervision.
OQL045106
OQL045029
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed,
the warning chime will sound for a
few seconds and a message will
appear on the LCD display or the
warning indicator will illuminate.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
To open the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever backward to the 1st detent position.
4 49
Features of your vehicle
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the 1st detent position.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
Push the sunroof glass control lever
backward to the 1st or 2nd detent
position, the sunroof glass will be
opened.
To stop the sunroof glass movement
at any point, push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Sliding the sunroof
✽ NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
OQL045030
CAUTION - Automatic
sunroof shade
• Do not pull or push the sunshade by hand as such action
may damage the sunshade or
cause it to malfunction.
• Close the sunroof when driving in dusty environments.
Dust may cause a malfunction
of the vehicle system.
4 50
When the sunshade is closed
Push the sunroof control lever backward to the 2nd detent position, both
the sunshade and sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, push
the sunroof control glass lever
momentarily.
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed
by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.
WARNING - Sunroof
OXM049029
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the sunroof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
✽ NOTICE
If you drive with the sunroof opened
right after a vehicle wash or rain,
water may get inside the vehicle.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
4 51
Features of your vehicle
Tilting the sunroof
OQL045031
When the sunshade is closed
Push the sunroof control lever upward,
the sunshade will slide halfway open
then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
Push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
4 52
Closing the sunroof
Resetting the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the 2nd detent position. The
sunroof glass and sunshade will
close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1.Start the engine.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close until
the sunshade slightly moves. Then,
release the lever.
5.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the 1st detent position. The
sunroof glass will close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open
→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide
Close → Sunshade Close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset and one
touch open and close should be
restored.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
4 53
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electronic power steering
(EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Electronic power steering is controlled by a power steering control
unit which senses the steering wheel
torque and vehicle speed to command the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as the
vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steering control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
4 54
• If the Electronic Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer and have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, the steering effort may be high or abnormal
noise may occur. If temperature
rises, the noise will likely disappear.
This is a normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary, and
the steering wheel is turned all the
way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel becomes
harder to turn. The power assist is
limited to protect the motor from
overheating.
As time passes, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
✽ NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immediately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK (OFF) position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electronic Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When the charging system warning
light comes on due to the low voltage (When the alternator or battery) does not operate normally or
malfunctions), the steering wheel
may require increased steering
effort.
Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
WARNING - Steering
wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.
OQL045032
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3, if
equipped) then pull up the lockrelease lever to lock (4) the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired position before driving.
4 55
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
After adjustment, sometimes the
lock release lever may not lock the
steering wheel. It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are
not engaged correctly. In this case,
adjust the steering wheel again and
then lock the steering wheel.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
WARNING
If the steering wheel becomes
too warm, turn the system off.
The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
✽ NOTICE
OQL045033
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off.
4 56
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Do not install any type of grip
cover for the steering wheel, it
may impair the function of the
heated steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of steering
wheel is damaged by sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
Horn
OQL045034
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽ NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
4 57
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision through the rear window.
WARNING - Mirror adjust-
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
ment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag.
OQL045035
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever (3) is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever (3) toward
you to reduce the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
during night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
❈ (1) : Day, (2) : Night
4 58
Features of your vehicle
Electric chromatic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the
vehicle and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
OQL045059
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light
(2) will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light
(2) will illuminate.
❈ (2) : Indicator, (3) : Sensor
4 59
Features of your vehicle
Electrochromic mirror with
HomeLink system (if equipped)
Indicator light
Homelink buttons
HomeLink®
OQLA045068
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the I button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the O button (2) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
4 60
Glare detection
sensor
OQLA045069
Wireless Control System
Your new mirror comes with an
integrated HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, which allows you to program the mirror to activate your
garage door(s), estate gate, home
lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various
existing transmitters.
Retain the original transmitter for
future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes
(follow step 1 in the “Programming”
portion of this text).
Features of your vehicle
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be
replaced in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:
✽ NOTICE
Flashing
OQLA045070
1. When programming the buttons for
the first time, press and hold the
left and center buttons ( ,
)
simultaneously until the indicator
light begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds. (This procedure erases the factory-set default
codes. Do not perform this step
when programming the additional
HomeLink buttons.)
For non rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door openers, follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please
follow the Canadian Programming
section.
For help with determining whether
your garage door opener is
non-rolling code or rolling code,
please refer to the garage door openers owner’s manual or contact
HomeLink customer service at 1800-355-3515.
4 61
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Some gate and garage door openers
may require you to replace step #3
with the “cycling” procedure noted
in the “Canadian Programming”
section of this document.
m
8c
2Flashing
OQLA045071
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to
train and the button on the transmitter while the transmitter is
approximately 2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the mirror. Do not
release the buttons until step 3
has been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)
4 62
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped devices)
with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing
the “Programming” portion of this
text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker
& easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on the device’s motor head
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating
the “learn” or “smart” button, reference the device’s owner’s manual
or contact HomeLink at 1-800355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 seconds to complete step number 6.
Features of your vehicle
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press and release the programmed HomeLink button up to
three times. The rolling code
equipped device should now recognize the HomeLink signal and
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two
buttons may now be programmed
if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the “Programming”
portion of this text.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the
programmed HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, security system, entry door lock, estate
gate, or home or office lighting). For
convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used
at any time. The HomeLink Wireless
Controls System (once programmed)
or the original hand-held transmitter
may be used to activate the device
(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
Erasing programmed HomeLink
buttons
Flashing
OQLA045070
To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaneously, until the
indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time.
4 63
Features of your vehicle
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink
using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the hand-held transmitter
2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from
the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button (or press and
“cycle” - as described in “Canadian
Programming”).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be
activated by pushing the HomeLink
button that has just been programmed. This procedure will not
affect any other programmed
HomeLink buttons.
4 64
Canadian Programming
Garage & gate openers
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the HomeLink button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the
“Programming” portion of this text)
while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Accessories
If you would like additional information on the HomeLink Wireless
Control System, HomeLink compatible products, or to purchase other
accessories such as the HomeLink®
Lighting Package, please contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the
mirror, do not force the mirror
for adjustment. To remove ice,
use a deicer spray, or a sponge
or soft cloth with very warm
water.
4 65
Features of your vehicle
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use an
approved spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Adjusting outside rearview mirror
(if equipped)
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
OQLE045038
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror, press the R or L
button (1) to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a
corresponding point ( ) on the mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the button into
neutral(center) position to prevent
inadvertent adjustment.
4 66
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
(if equipped)
OQLA045040
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch when the ignition switch is
ACC or ON position as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows:
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the folding key or smart key.
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
button on the outside door handle.
• The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the engine start/stop
button is in the OFF position.
However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than
necessary while the engine is
not running.
In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
4 67
Features of your vehicle
OQL045039
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
4 68
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
■ Type B
6. Warning and indicator lights
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
OQL045191C/OQL045193C
4 69
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
LCD Display Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
OQLE045233
OQL045041
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control button
(“+” or “-”) when the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the
taillights are turned on.
• If you hold the illumination control
button (“+” or “-”), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
OQLA045061
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1)
: MODE button for change the
LCD MODES
(2) / : MOVE scroll switch for
select the items
(3) OK : SET/RESET button for set
the items or reset the items
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
4 70
Features of your vehicle
Tachometer
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Speedometer
OQL045183
OQL045184C
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or
miles per hour (mph).
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
OQLE045230
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the "H"
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in chapter 7.
4 71
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Hot radiator
✽ NOTICE - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger. You must
Stop and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the “E
(Empty)” level.
Fuel Gauge
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure and could cause severe
burns. Wait until the engine is
cool before adding coolant to
the reservoir.
OQLE045232
This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
4 72
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 9.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
Features of your vehicle
Odometer
Outside Temperature Gauge
To change the temperature unit (from
°F to °C or from °C to °F) :
The temperature unit can be
changed by using the "User
Settings" mode of the LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OQL045108
OQL045109
The odometer Indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 1,599,999 km
or 999,999 miles.
This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 85°C
(-40°F ~ 185°F)
The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being distracted.
4 73
Features of your vehicle
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
OJF045138
This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.
• Park : P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive : D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
4 74
Features of your vehicle
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
LCD Modes
Modes
Trip Computer
Symbol
Explanation
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
❈ For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Turn By Turn
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
LDWS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
❈ For more details, refer to “Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)” in chapter 6.
A/V
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and pressure status of each tire.
Service
This mode informs of warning messages related to Low tire pressure or malfunction of
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on.
User Settings
On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
4 75
Features of your vehicle
Edit, settings after engaging parking brake / Edit, settings after
shifting to P
Service Interval
Service Mode
Tire Pressure (if equipped)
OQLE045116
OQLE045117
OQLE045195
This warning message illuminates if
you try to select an item from the
User Settings mode while driving.
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and moving the shift lever to P (Park).
4 76
This mode displays the pressure status of each tire.
You can change the tire pressure unit
in "User settings" mode.
❈ For more information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
Service interval
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30 days,
“Service in” message is displayed for
several seconds each time you set
the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OQLE045196
OQLE045197
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the already inputted
service interval, the “Service
required” message will appear.
The “Service required” message is
displayed for several seconds each
time you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set
“Service in OFF” message is displayed on the LCD display.
If you want to activate Service interval function, set the service interval
in the User setting mode.
❈ For more details, refer to “User
setting mode" in this chapter.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted
before:
Press the OK button (reset) for more
than 1 second.
4 77
Features of your vehicle
Master Warning Mode
User Settings Mode
WARNING
Description
• This warning light informs the driver the following situations
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Lamp malfunction and so on.
The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
4 78
Do not adjust the User Setting
while driving.You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or accidents.
OQLE045118
In this mode, you can change setting
of the doors, lights, etc.
Features of your vehicle
Driving Assist (if equipped)
Items
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(if equipped)
AEB (Autonomous
Emergency Braking)
(if equipped)
Explanation
If this item is checked, the rear cross traffic alert function will be activated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Blind Spot Detection System” in chapter 6.
To activate or deactivate the AEB system.
❈ For more details, refer to “Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)” in chapter 6.
FCW
Choose the sensitivity of the FCW.
(Forward Collision Warning)
❈ For more details, refer to “Autonomous Emergency Braking(AEB)” in chapter 6.
(if equipped)
4 79
Features of your vehicle
Door/Liftgate
Items
Explanation
Automatically Lock
• Enable on Speed : All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds
15km/h (9.3mph).
• Enable on Shift : All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)
position.
Automatically Unlock
• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the
ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
• On Shift to P : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock
(If equipped)
4 80
If this item is checked, the two press unlock will be activated.
Power Liftgate
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the power liftgate function will be activated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Liftgate” in this chapter.
Smart Liftgate
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the smart liftgate function will be activated.
If the power liftgate function is not activated, you cannot activate this function.
❈ For more details, refer to “Liftgate” in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
Light
Items
Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
❈ For more details, refer to “Light” in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay
Welcome Light
(If equipped)
• If this item is checked, the head lamp delay function will be activated.
• If this item is checked, the welcome light function will be activated.
Sound
Items
Park Assist System Vol.
(if equipped)
Explanation
• Adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3)
❈ For more details, refer to “Parking Assist System” in this chapter.
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) • If this item is checked, the blind spot detection sound will be activated.
Sound (if equipped)
❈ For more details, refer to “Blind Spot Detection System” in chapter 6.
Welcome Sound
(if equipped)
• If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated.
4 81
Features of your vehicle
Service interval
Items
Service Interval
Explanation
On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On : You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
❈ For more details, refer to “Service Mode” in this chapter.
Convenience
Items
Steering Position
Wiper/Light Display
(if equipped)
Auto rear wiper (reverse)
(if equipped)
Explanation
If this item is checked, the warning function regarding the steering wheel alignment will be activated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Warning Messages” in this chapter.
If this item is checked, the LCD display shows a selected wiper/light mode whenever you
changed its mode.
If this item is checked, the rear wiper will automatically activated when the front wiper is in ON
position and shift lever is in R (reverse) position.
Wireless smart phone
If this item checked, the Wireless smart phone charging system will be activated.
charging system (if equipped)
4 82
Features of your vehicle
Other features
Items
Fuel Economy Auto Reset
Fuel Economy Unit
Explanation
If this item is checked, the average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling or after
ignition.
Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit
Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit
(if equipped)
Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)
4 83
Features of your vehicle
TRIP MODES (TRIP COMPUTER)
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.
✽ NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
FUEL ECONOMY
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
TRIP A
• Tripmeter
• Average Vehicle Speed
• Elapsed Time
TRIP B
• Tripmeter
• Average Vehicle Speed
• Elapsed Time
Digital speedometer
To change the trip mode, scroll the
TRIP scroll switch ( / ) in the trip
computer mode.
4 84
Fuel Economy
OQL045251C
Range (1)
• The range is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 1 ~ 9,999 km. or
1 ~ 9,999 mi
• If the estimated distance is below
1km (1mi.), the trip computer will
display “---” as range.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the range function may
not operate correctly.
Features of your vehicle
• The range may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range : 1 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.
Manual reset
To reset average fuel economy manually, press the OK button (reset) on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
reset automatically whenever refueling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
• OFF - You may set to default manually by using the trip switch reset button.
• When driving - The vehicle will automatically set to default once 4 hours
pass after the Ignition is in OFF.
• When refueling - After refueling
more than 6 liters and driving over
1km/h, the vehicle will reset to
default automatically.
✽ NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03
miles) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
4 85
Features of your vehicle
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 30 L/100km
~ 0 ~ 50 MPG or 0
Trip A/B
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range : 0~240 km/h or
0~160 MPH
To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the OK button (reset) on the
steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed
is displayed.
OQL045141C
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or
mi.
To reset the tripmeter, press the OK
button (reset) on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
4 86
✽ NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less
than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
Features of your vehicle
Elapsed Time(3)
• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
To reset elapsed time, press the OK
button (reset) on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
Digital speedometer
One time driving information
mode
✽ NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
OQLE045143
This mode displays the current
speed of the vehicle.
OQL045144C
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automatically. The information provided is calculated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1km (1mi.), the range (3) will display
as "---".
When low fuel warning light ( ) illuminates in the cluster, the refuel
message will appear(4).
4 87
Features of your vehicle
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
LDWS Mode (if equipped)
A/V Mode (if equipped)
OQLE045200
OQLA055168
OJF045142L
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
This mode displays the state of the
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS).
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
❈For more information, refer to
“Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 6.
4 88
Features of your vehicle
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
Warning Messages
Shift to P position
(for smart key system)
OQLE045124
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
OQLE045121
OQLE045202
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while turning the steering wheel right and left.
4 89
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
Check steering wheel lock system (for smart key system)
OQLE045203
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
4 90
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system)
OQLE045204
OQLE045126
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
Features of your vehicle
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
OQLE045206
OQLE045120
OQLE045122
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 91
Features of your vehicle
Press start button with key
(for smart key system)
Check fuse BRAKE SWITCH
(for smart key system)
Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system)
OQLE045249
OQLE045128
OQLE045125
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
4 92
✽ NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position;
however; we recommend that you
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position for your safety.
Features of your vehicle
Door/Hood/Liftgate Open
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
OQLE045129
OQL045106
• It means that any door, hood, or
liftgate is open.
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine and then
open the driver's door when the
sunroof is open.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
OQLE045207
This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur,
the warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 5 times
and then illuminates, and also warning chime sounds once.
- The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below
approximately 4°C (40°F).
4 93
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive
more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp
turning, etc.
4 94
OQLE045131
OQLE045208
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
Features of your vehicle
Turn on FUSE SWITCH
Low Fuel
Check headlight
OQLE045209
OQLE045211
OQLE045133
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
This warning message illuminates if
the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- When the low fuel level warning
light is illuminated.
- When the trip computer displays
“--- km (or mile)” as range.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb except LED lamp or circuit malfunction) with the headlamp. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 8.
✽ NOTICE
• When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 9.
• If different wattage bulb is
equipped with the vehicle, this
warning message is not displayed.
4 95
Features of your vehicle
Check AEB system (if equipped)
Check Smart Phone Wireless
Charger (if equipped)
Check high beam assist system
(if equipped)
OQLE045212
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system. In this case, have
your vehicle be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to
“Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system” in chapter 6.
4 96
OQLE045135
OQLE045210
If a smart phone is still left on the
wireless charging pad unattended,
even when the ignition is in ACC
OFF and the instrument panel's one
time driving information mode has
finished, a warning message will light
up on the instrument panel.
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb or circuit malfunction) with the
headlamp. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Smart
Phone Wireless Charger” in this
chapter.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning lights
✽ NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
❈For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
4 97
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
4 98
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 8).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system are still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light ON is dangerous. If the Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
illuminate with the parking brake
released, it indicates that the brake
fluid level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden
braking
thereby
increasing the risk of a crash
and injury. In this case, avoid
high speed driving and abrupt
braking. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
4 99
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
4 100
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Catalytic
Converter Damage
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Charging System
Warning Light
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 8).
If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
4 101
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Engine
damage
If the engine is not stopped
immediately after the engine oil
pressure warning light is illuminated and stays on while the
engine is running, serious
engine damage may result.
If the warning light stays on while the
engine is running, it indicates that
there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine
is started, turn the engine off
immediately. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
❈For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
❈For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
4 102
WARNING - Low tire
pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pressure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the
road.
Features of your vehicle
Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light
EPB
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Parking
Brake (EPB) Warning Light
The Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light may illuminate when the Electronic Stability
control (ESC) Indicator Light comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not
working properly (This does not
indicate malfunction of the EPB).
Master Warning light
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driver
of the following situations
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Lamp malfunction and so on.
The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Warning
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction with
the AEB.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AWD system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 103
Features of your vehicle
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning AFLS
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• Once you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light remains
on, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
❈For more details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in chapter 6.
4 104
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.
❈For more details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in chapter 6.
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the
engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in chapter 6).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 105
Features of your vehicle
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
High Beam Indicator
Light
High beam assist indicator (if equipped)
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light position.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the High beam
assist system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.
4 106
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
❈For more details, refer to "High
beam assist" in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
Cruise
Indicator Light
CRUISE
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
❈For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 6.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
SET
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
❈For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 6.
AUTO HOLD Indicator
Light (if equipped)
AUTO
HOLD
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold system activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the auto hold system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Auto
Hold” in chapter 6.
Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When the lane departure
warning system does not detect
the lane line.
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane departure warning system.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Lane
Departure
Warning
System
(LDWS)” in chapter 6.
4 107
Features of your vehicle
ECO Indicator Light
(if equipped)
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the Active ECO system is
activated by pressing the DRIVE
mode button.
• The ECO indicator (green) will illuminate to show that the Active
ECO is operating.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select “SPORT” mode
as drive mode.
• The SPORT indicator (orange) will
illuminate to show that the SPORT
is operating.
❈For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
in chapter 6.
❈For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode Integrated Control System”
in chapter 6.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select AWD Lock mode
by pressing the AWD LOCK button.
- The AWD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
CAUTION - AWD Lock
Mode
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of AWD related parts.
4 108
Features of your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Rear parking
OQL045400
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming if
any object is sensed within a distance
of 120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The sensing
range and objects detectable by the
back sensors (➀) are limited.
Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking assist system.
assist system
Never rely solely on the rear
parking assist system. Always
perform a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction. Stop
immediately if you are aware of
a child anywhere near your vehicle. Some objects may not be
detected by the sensors, due to
the object's size or material.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
OQLA045517
• This system will activate when the
indicator on the rear parking assist
OFF button is not illuminated. If
you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the
rear parking assist OFF button
again. (The indicator on the button
will illuminate.) To turn the system
on, press the button again. (The
indicator on the button will go off.)
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
4 109
Features of your vehicle
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the
back-up warning system is in operation is approximately 120 cm (47
in.) at the rear bumper center area,
60 cm (23.5 in.) at the rear bumper
both side area.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.
4 110
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm
(24 in. to 12 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more frequently.
• When an object is within 30 cm (11
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally once the
moisture clears.
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
Features of your vehicle
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
sound absorbent material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 in.) in height and narrower
than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not sound consistently
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 30 cm (12 in.)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or covered with snow, dirt, or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until the
material is removed using a soft
cloth.
• To prevent damage, do not push,
scratch or strike the sensor.
✽ NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors. It cannot detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
4 111
Features of your vehicle
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to the
R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a malfunction in the rear parking
assist system. If this occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
4 112
Features of your vehicle
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Rear
OQL045400
This system is a supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors (➀) are
limited. Whenever moving pay as
much attention to what is in front and
behind of you as you would in a vehicle without a parking assist system.
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
■ Front
WARNING
OQL045401
The parking assist system assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within the distance of 100 cm
(39 in.) in front and 120 cm (47 in.)
behind the vehicle.
The parking assist system is a
supplementary function only.
The operation of the parking
assist system can be affected
by several factors (including
environmental conditions).
It is the responsibility of the
driver to always check the front
and rear views before and while
parking.
OQL045402
• This system activates when the
parking assist system button is
pressed with the ignition switch ON.
• The indicator of the parking assist
system button turns on automatically and activates the parking assist
system when you shift the gear to
the R (Reverse) position. It will turn
off automatically when you drive
above 30 km/h (18.6 mph).
4 113
Features of your vehicle
• The sensing distance while backing
up is approximately 120 cm (47 in.)
when you are driving less than 10
km/h (6.2 mph).
• The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 100 cm
(39 in.) when you are driving less
than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.
• The side sensors are activated
when you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position.
• If the vehicle speed is above
20km/h, the system automatically
turns off. To activate again, push
the button.
Type of warning indicator and sound
: with Warning sound
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
When driving
forward
100cm~61cm Front
120cm~61cm Rear
-
60cm~31cm
-
30cm
It may not operate if it’s distance
from the object is already less than
approximately 25 cm when the system is ON.
4 114
Rear
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Front
✽ NOTICE
Warning sound
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Front
Rear
When driving
rearward
-
Buzzer sounds
continuously
✽ NOTICE
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration
according to objects or sensor status.
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of
the sensors; It can not detect
objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small
or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors
may not be detected by the sensors. Always visually check behind
the vehicle when backing up.
• Be sure to inform any drivers of
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar
with the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when moisture melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign matter such as snow or water.
(Sensing range will return to normal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive
noise such as vehicle horns, loud
motorcycle engines, or truck air
brakes can interfere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
4 115
Features of your vehicle
Detecting range may decrease
when:
1. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m and narrower than 14 cm in
diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
4 116
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the speed
and shapes of the objects detected.
2. The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm from the sensor,
or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use with caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow or water, the sensor may
be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Pay close attention when the
vehicle is driven close to
objects on the road, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by
the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more
of the below occurs you may have a
malfunction in the rear parking assist
system.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently.
•
is displayed. (if equipped)
(blinks)
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occupants related to a parking assist system. Always drive safely and cautiously.
4 117
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA
OQL045403
OQL045404BR
The rearview camera will activate
with the ignition switch ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
4 118
This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle
through the rearview display mirror
while backing up unless equipped
with a navigation system, then will
display on the screen.
The rearview camera may be turned
off by pressing the ON/OFF button
when the rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press
the ON/OFF button again when the
ignition switch is on and the shift
lever is in R (Reverse). Also, the
camera will turn on automatically
whenever the ignition switch is
turned off and on again.
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
inside/outside rearview mirrors and
the area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up because
there is a dead zone that can't be
seen by the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
❈ If your vehicle is equipped with
AVN (Audio, Video and Navigation)
system, rearview display will show
behind the vehicle through the
AVN monitor while backing-up.
Refer to a separately supplied
manual for detailed information.
WARNING - Backing &
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear view
camera when backing. You must
always use methods of viewing
the area behind you including
looking over both shoulders as
well as continuously checking all
three rear view mirrors. Due to
the difficulty of ensuring that the
area behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being discharged if the lights are left in the
ON position. The system automatically shuts off the parking lights 30
seconds after the ignition key is
removed and the driver’s door is
opened and closed.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of the road at night
and opens the driver’s side door.
If necessary, to keep the parking
lights on when the ignition key is
removed, perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is
especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The headlight switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
3. The front fog light is ON.
4. Engaging the Parking Brake
Lighting control
OQL045491C
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Auto light position (if equipped)
(3) Parking & Tail light
(4) Headlight position
4 119
Features of your vehicle
Parking & Tail light (
)
Headlight position (
OQL045468
When the light switch is in the parking light position, the tail, license and
instrument panel lights will turn ON.
Auto light position
)
OQL045469
When the light switch is in the headlight position, the head, tail, license
lights will turn ON.
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
4 120
OQL045405
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and headlights will turn ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of
light outside the vehicle.
When the light switch is positioned at
an auto light position, at first, the
wiper will turn on and then, after 5
seconds the head lamp will turn on
automatically.
If the head lamp has been turned on
due to this function of the vehicle, the
head lamp will turn off 60 seconds
after the wiper has been turned off.
Features of your vehicle
High beam operation
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
OQL045493C
OQL045492C
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever to you when the high
beam is on. The lever will return to its
original position.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
4 121
Features of your vehicle
High Beam Assist (if equipped)
OQL045470
The High Beam Assist is a system
that automatically adjusts the headlamp range (switches between high
beam and low beam) according to
the brightness of other vehicles and
road conditions.
4 122
Operating condition
1.Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2.Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The High Beam Assist ( ) indicator will illuminate.
3.The High Beam Assist will turn on
when vehicle speed is above
40 kph (25 mph).
• If the lever is pushed away when
the High Beam Assist is operating, the High Beam Assist will
turn off and the high beam will be
on continuously. The High Beam
Assist ( ) indicator will turn off.
• If the lever is pulled towards you
when the High Beam Assist is
operating, the High Beam Assist
will turn off.
4.If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the High Beam
Assist will turn off and the low
beam will be on continuously.
The high beam switches to low beam
in the below conditions.
- When the High Beam Assist is off.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected
from the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected
from the front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not needed.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When vehicle speed is below
24 kph (15 mph).
- When headlamp / taillamp of bicycle/motorcycle is detected
Features of your vehicle
The system may not operate normally in the below conditions.
• When the light from the on-coming
or front vehicle is not detected
because of lamp damage, hidden
from sight, etc.
• When the lamp of the on-coming or
front vehicle is covered with dust,
snow or water.
• When the light from the on-coming
or front vehicle is not detected
because of exhaust fumes, smoke,
fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is covered
with foreign matters such as ice,
dust, fog, or is damaged.
• When there is a similar shape lamp
with the front vehicle’s lamps.
• When it is hard to see because of
fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not repaired
or replaced at an authorized dealer.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow curved
road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle in
front is visible on a crossroad or
curved road.
• When there is a traffic light, reflecting sign, flashing sign or mirror.
• When the road conditions are bad
such as being wet or covered with
snow.
• When the front vehicle’s headlamps are off but the fog lamps on.
• When a vehicle suddenly appears
from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from a
flat tire or being towed.
• When the LDWS (lane departure
warning system) warning light illuminates. (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windshield.
• Have on the windshield glass
replaced from an authorized dealer.
• Do not remove or damage related
parts of the High Beam Assist system.
• Be careful that water doesn’t get
into the High Beam Assist unit.
• Do not place objects on the dashboard that reflect light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if sunlight is
reflected.
• At times, the Smart High Beam
system may not work properly,
always check the road conditions
for your safety. When the system
does not operate normally, manually change between the high
beam and low beam.
4 123
Features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
Front fog light (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.
OQLA045514
OQL045049
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
4 124
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
Features of your vehicle
Check headlight
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator continuously remains on,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OQLA055176
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb except LED lamp or circuit malfunction) with the headlamp. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
• When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.
• If the different wattage bulb is
equipped with the vehicle, this
warning message is not displayed.
OQL045405
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle
speed, to keep your field of vision
wide by swiveling and leveling the
headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO position when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turning the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling operates continuously.
4 125
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
Rear window wiper/washer
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· HI – Continuous wipe
· LO – Intermittent wipe
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*
* if equipped
OQL045407/OQL045464
4 126
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this (MIST)
position and release it. The
wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this
position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Front windshield washers
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and
washer system.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
OQL045409
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
4 127
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.
4 128
CAUTION - Wipers &
windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
Rear window wiper and washer switch
OQL045465
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI : Continuous wipe
LO : Intermittent wipe
OFF : OFF
Features of your vehicle
OQL045466
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever
4 129
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING - Interior
Lights
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents
could
happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
Room lamp
■ Type A
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off, if the
lights are in the ON position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
5 seconds after the system is in
armed stage.
OQL045418
■ Type B
OQL045412
•
4 130
: The light stays on at all times.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Map lamp
■ Type A
OQLE045411
■ Type B
OQL045410
• Press the lens (1) to turn ON the
map lamp.
To turn the map lamp OFF press
the lens (1) again.
•
(2) : DOOR mode
- The map lamp and room lamp
come on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approximately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
come on for approximately 30 seconds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 minutes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON position or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode, press
the DOOR button (2) once again
(not pressed).
The DOOR mode and ROOM mode
can not be selected at the same time.
Front Room Lamp:
• Type A
(3): Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps
on.
(4): Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps
off.
• Type B
(3): Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps on
and off.
4 131
Features of your vehicle
Liftgate room lamp
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Glove box lamp
OQL045472
OQL045416
OQL045415
The liftgate room lamp comes on
when the liftgate is opened.
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary battery
drain, close the glove box securely
after using the glove box.
✽ NOTICE
The liftgate lamp comes on as long
as the liftgate lid is open. To prevent
unnecessary charging system drain,
close the liftgate lid securely after
using the liftgate.
4 132
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp
off, it may discharge the battery
or damage the sunvisor.
Features of your vehicle
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Headlight (Headlamp) escort
function
The headlights (and/or taillights)
remain on for approximately 5 minutes after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter or smart key twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
Interior light
Pocket lamp (if equipped)
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
When all doors are locked and
closed, the pocket lamp will come on
for 15 seconds if any of the below is
performed.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off immediately.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off immediately.
4 133
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
■ Type A
■ Type B
OQL045302
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch
panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates
when the defroster is ON. If there is
heavy accumulation of snow on the
rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 20 minutes or
when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear window defroster.
4 134
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Air conditioning button
5. Air intake control button
6. Mode selection button
7. Temperature control button
✽ NOTICE
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
OQL045300L
4 135
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position (if
equipped).
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
OQLE045304
4 136
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
OQL045303
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent MAX
A/C, Face, Bi-Level, Floor, FloorDefrost and Defrost air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
✽ NOTICE - 2nd row outlet
vents (E,F)
• The air flow of the 2nd row outlet
vents is controlled by the front climate control system and delivered
through the inside air duct of the
floor (E, F).
• The air flow of the 2nd row outlet
vents (E, F) may be weaker than
the instrument panel vents for the
long air duct.
4 137
Features of your vehicle
MAX A/C selection
Temperature control
OQL045306
OQL045305
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
4 138
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OQL045307
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm and
hot air or left position for cooler air.
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
OQL045308
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, press the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become
stale. In addition, prolonged use of
the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result
in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically for ventilating the
car. Then, if you select the recirculated air position, the outside (fresh) air
will be selected automatically after 3
minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
WARNING - Reduced visibility
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
4 139
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Sleeping with
Fan speed control
Air conditioning
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
4 140
OQL045309
OQL045310
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning system off.
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1.Set the mode to the
position.
2.Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1.Set the mode to the
position.
2.Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5.If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with refrigerant.
1.Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2.Set the mode to the
position.
3.Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4.Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• The refrigerant system should only
be serviced by trained and certified
technicians to ensure proper and
safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be repaired
or replaced with one removed from
a used or salvaged vehicle and new
replacement MAC evaporators
should be certified (and labeled) as
meeting SAE Standard J2842.
4 141
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Excessive AC
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high.
Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
CAUTION
When opening the windows in
humid weather, air conditioning
may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause
damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be
used with the windows closed.
4 142
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system should be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized Kia dealer.
4 143
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning system is under very high pressure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explosion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certified technicians.
CAUTION - AC Repair
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle may
occur. To prevent damage, the
air conditioning system in your
vehicle should only be serviced
by trained and certified technicians.
4 144
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Front windshield defroster button
4. Rear window defroster button
5. Air conditioning button
6. Air intake control button
7. OFF button
8. Fan speed control button
9. Mode selection button
10. Passenger's temperature control knob
■ Type B
11. SYNC temperature control selection button
12. Climate control display
13. Climate information screen selection button
✽ NOTICE
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
OQL045301L/OQL045329L
4 145
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air conditioning
■ Driver’s side
■ Passenger’s side
OQL045315
OQL045311
1. Press the AUTO button. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by setting the temperature.
4 146
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature.
✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The ‘AUTO’
sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F).
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
OQL045312
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
OQL045313
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
4 147
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
■ Type B
Floor/Defrost-Level
OQL045343L
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
4 148
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
■ Driver’s side
■ Passenger’s side
OQL045306
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OQL045316
OQL045315
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the extreme right.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the extreme left.
When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust
the driver and passenger side temperature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the driver side temperature
control knob. The driver and passenger side temperature will be
adjusted equally.
4 149
Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side temperature control knob to adjust the driver side temperature.
• Operate the passenger side temperature control knob to adjust the
passenger side temperature.
Air intake control
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit
as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control position, push the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
OQL045317
4 150
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Features of your vehicle
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically for ventilating the
car. Then, if you select the recirculated air position, the outside (fresh) air
will be selected automatically after 3
minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
Fan speed control
Air conditioning
■ Type A
■ Type A
OQL045318
■ Type B
OQL045319
■ Type B
OQL045318L
OQL045319L
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by operating the fan
speed control button.
To change the fan speed, press ( )
the button for higher speed, or push
( ) the button for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the front blower OFF button.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
4 151
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Reduced
Visibility
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
WARNING - Sleeping with
OFF mode
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
on as this may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in
the oxygen level and/or body
temperature.
WARNING - Recirculated
Air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
4 152
OQL045320
Press the front blower OFF button to
turn off the front air climate control
system. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons
as long as the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
Features of your vehicle
Climate information screen
selection (if equipped)
OQL045321
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
System operation
Ventilation
1.Set the mode to the
position.
2.Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1.Set the mode to the
position.
2.Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5.If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
4 153
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-1234yf refrigerant.
1.Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.
2.Set the mode to the
position.
3.Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4.Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
CAUTION - Excessive A/C
Use
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high.
Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
CAUTION
When opening the windows in
humid weather, air conditioning
may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause
damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be
used with the windows closed.
4 154
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
Features of your vehicle
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
✽ NOTICE
Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
• Replace the filter every 24,000 km
(15,000 miles) or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
1LDA5047
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
4 155
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning system is under very high pressure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explosion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certified technicians.
CAUTION
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage
to the vehicle may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning
system in your vehicle should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
4 156
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and the
windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode
selection to the
position
and fan speed control to the
lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
OQL045322
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
4 157
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
OQL045323
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically press the corresponding button manually.
4 158
OQL045324L
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the
position is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
Defogging logic
Manual climate control system
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning is controlled automatically according to
certain conditions such as
or
position. To cancel automatic defogging logic or return to the automatic
defogging logic, do the following.
OQL045325L
OQL045326
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button (
).
3. Within 3 seconds after pressing
the defroster button, press the air
intake control button at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
4 159
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture on the inside of the
windshield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follow. For
example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Operating the air conditioning.
OQL045327
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button (
).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The recirculation indicator blinks 3
times with 0.5 second of interval. It
indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
4 160
OQL045057
Auto defogging reduces the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
Features of your vehicle
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging
System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
When the Auto Defogging System is
canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink
3 times and the ADS OFF will be displayed on the climate control information screen.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6
times without a signal.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
OQLA045328
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.
4 161
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover can not close securely.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store, propane cylinders
or other flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
4 162
Center console storage
Glove box
OQL045419
OQL045420L
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key. (if
equipped)
To open the glove box, pull the lever
(1) and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after
use.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Glove Box
Sunglass holder
Luggage box
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
✽ NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.
OQL045421
OQL045458
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder push it up.
You can place tools, etc. in the box
for easy access.
Grasp the handle on the edge of the
cover and lift it.
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass
holder. Heavier objects can be
thrown from the holder in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the
passengers.
4 163
Features of your vehicle
Two types of luggage board
use (if equipped)
■ Type A
OQLA055177
■ Type B
OQLA055178
If the vehicle is equipped with a TMK
(Tire Mobility Kit) or a temporary tire,
you can make the luggage board to
flat (Type A) or lower (Type B) for
more luggage storage.
4 164
When you use the luggage board
(Type B), you should put it between
guides (1).
However, if the vehicle is equipped
with a full spare tire, you can make the
luggage board to only flat (Type A).
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder
■ Front seat
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
Bottle holder
OQL045424
■ Rear seat
CAUTION
OQLA045515
Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
✽ NOTICE
Only bottles should be placed in the
holder labeled "Bottles Only."
OQL045426
CAUTION
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not use heat to dry the cup
holders. This may damage the
cup holder.
4 165
Features of your vehicle
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
■ Front seat
Seat warmer
■ Front seat
)→MIDDLE(
)→LOW(
)
→
OFF→HIGH(
OQL045430
■ Rear seat
■ Rear seat
)→LOW(
)
→
OFF→HIGH(
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
OQL045432
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
4 166
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low temperatures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns. These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
Features of your vehicle
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
OQL045433
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to ventilate your seat
cushion, press the switch (blue
color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
→
OFF→HIGH(
)→MIDDLE(
)→LOW(
)
• The seat warmer (with air ventilation) defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the air ventilation
seat, dry the seat completely.
Sunvisor
OQL045427
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
4 167
Features of your vehicle
* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Power outlet
■ Front seat
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
If you use the vanity mirror lamp,
turn off the lamp before returning the sunvisor to its original
position, otherwise it could
result in battery discharge and
possible sunvisor damage.
OQL045428
■ Rear seat (if equipped)
OQL045429
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
4 168
• Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic
interference
when
plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the
plug may overheat and the fuse
may open.
Features of your vehicle
• Plug in battery equipped electronic
devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery
may flow into the vehicle’s electri
cal/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.
WARNING - Electric shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pen, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may receive an
electric shock.
✽ NOTICE
Do not use aftermarket chargers to
charge devices. Only use device certified cables to charge.
USB charger (if equipped)
• Some devices are not supported
for fast charging but will be
charged with normal speed.
• Use the USB charger when the
engine is running to prevent battery discharge.
• Only devices that fit the USB port
can be used.
• The USB charger can be used only
for battery charging purposes.
• Battery chargers cannot be
charged.
OQL045482
The USB charger is designed to
recharge batteries of small size electrical devices using a USB cable. The
electrical devices can be recharged
when the Engine Start/Stop button is
in ACC/ON/START position.
The battery charging state may be
monitored on the electrical device.
Disconnect the USB cable from the
USB port after use.
4 169
Features of your vehicle
Wireless smart phone charging system (if equipped)
OQL045467BR
A wireless smart phone charging
system located in front of the center
console
Firmly close all doors, and turn the
ignition to ACC or IGN ON. To start
wireless charging, place the smart
phone equipped with wireless charging function on the wireless charging
pad.
4 170
For best wireless charging results,
place the smart phone on the center
of the charging pad.
The wireless charging system is
designed for one smart phone
equipped with QI per single usage
only. Please refer to the smart phone
accessory cover or the smart phone
manufacturer homepage to check
whether your smart phone supports
QI function.
Wireless smart phone charging
1. Remove any object on the smart
phone charging pad including the
smart key. If there is any foreign
object on the pad other than a
smart phone, the wireless charging
function may not operate properly.
2. Place the smart phone on the center of the wireless charging pad.
3. The indicator light will change to
orange once the wireless charging
begins. After the charging is complete, the orange light will change
to green.
4. You can choose to turn the wireless
charging function to either ON or
OFF by selecting the USM on the
instrument cluster. (Please refer to
“Instrument Cluster” for details).
If the wireless charging does not
work, gently move your smart phone
around the pad until the charging indicator light turns orange. Depending
on the smart phone, the charging indicator light may not turn green even
after the charging is complete.
Features of your vehicle
If the wireless charging is not functioning properly, the orange light will
blink and flash for ten seconds then
turn off. In such cases, remove the
smart phone from the pad and
replace it on the pad again, or double
check the charging status.
If you leave the smart phone on the
charging pad when the vehicle ignition is in OFF, the vehicle will alert
you through warning messages and
sound (applicable for vehicles with
voice guidance (function) after the
‘Good bye’ function on the instrument cluster ends.
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
CAUTION - Metal in
Wireless Charging System
If any metallic object such as
coins is located between the
wireless charging system and
the smart phone, the charging
may be disrupted. Also, the
metallic object may heat up and
potentially damage the charging
system. If there is any metallic
object between the smart phone
and the charging pad, immediately remove the smart phone.
Remove the metallic object after
it has cooled down.
4 171
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When the interior temperature of
the wireless charging system rises
above a set temperature, the wireless charging will cease to function. After the interior temperature drops below the threshold,
the wireless charging function will
resume.
• The wireless charging may not
function properly when there is a
heavy accessory cover on the
smart phone.
• The wireless charging will stop
when using the wireless smart key
search function to prevent radio
wave disruption.
• The wireless charging will stop
when the smart key is moved out
of the vehicle with the ignition in
ON.
• The wireless charging will stop
when any of the doors is opened
(applicable for vehicles equipped
with smart keys).
• The wireless charging will stop
when the vehicle is turned OFF.
(Continued)
4 172
(Continued)
• The wireless charging will stop
when the smart phone is not in
complete contact with the wireless
charging pad.
• Items equipped with magnetic
components such as credit card,
telephone card, bankbook, any
transportation ticket and such
may become damaged during
wireless charging.
• Place the smart phone on the center of the charge pad for best
results. The smart phone may not
charge when placed near the rim
of the charging pad. When the
smart phone does get charged, it
may heat up excessively.
• For smart phones without built-in
wireless charging system, an
appropriate accessory has to be
equipped.
• Smart phones of some manufacturers may display messages on
weak current. This is due to the
particular characteristic of the
smart phone and does not imply a
malfunction on wireless charging
function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The indicator light of some manufacturers’ smart phones may still
be orange after the smart phone is
fully charged. This is due to the
particular characteristic of the
smart phone and not a malfunction of the wireless charging.
• When any smart phone without a
wireless charging function or a
metallic object is placed on the
charging pad, a small noise may
sound. This small sound is due to
the vehicle discerning compatibility of the object placed on the
charging pad. It does not affect
your vehicle or the smart phone in
any way.
Features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
Floor mat anchor (s)
(if equipped)
WARNING
■ Type A
OQL045446
❈ This actual feature may differ from the illustration.
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
■ Type B
OPS046500
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothe pockets. In
an accident or when the curtain
air bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
OXM043309
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can interfere with pedal operation.
4 173
Features of your vehicle
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
Luggage net holder
CAUTION
■ Type A
To prevent damage to the vehicle, care should be taken when
carrying fragile or bulky objects
in the luggage compartment.
OQL045456
■ Type B
WARNING
Your vehicle was manufactured
with driver's side floor mat
anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in
place. To avoid any interference
with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only the Kia floor
mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
4 174
OQL045457
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Luggage net
Always keep your face and
body out of the luggage net
recoil path and avoid using the
luggage net when the straps
have visible signs of wear or
damage. The luggage net can
snap and cause injuries.
Features of your vehicle
1. Pull up the luggage cover using
the handle(1).
2. Pull up a triangle-shaped cover
(2).
3. Place the cargo security screen on
the lower portion of the cargo
area.
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
OQL045458
OQL045461
Use the cargo security screen to
hide items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen,
pull the handle backward and insert
the edges into the slots.
OQL045459
WARNING - Cargo
Security Screen
Do not place objects on the
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly
injure vehicle occupants during
an accident or when braking.
CAUTION
Do not place luggage on the
cargo security screen. This may
cause the security screen to
become damaged or malformed.
OQL045460
When not in use cargo security
screen, follow below steps.
4 175
Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
✽ NOTICE
Roof rack (if equipped)
OQL045462
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
Crossbars and fixing components
needed to install the roof rack on
your vehicle may be obtained from
an authorized Kia dealer or other
qualified shop.
4 176
• The crossbars (if equipped) should
be placed in the proper load carrying positions prior to placing items
onto the roof rack.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, be sure not to position
cargo onto the roof rack in such a
way that it could interfere with
sunroof operation.
• When the roof rack is not being
used to carry cargo, the crossbars
may need to be repositioned if
wind noise is detected.
CAUTION - Loading Roof
Rack
• When carrying cargo on the
roof rack, take the necessary
precautions to make sure the
cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
• When you are carrying cargo
on the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof (if equipped).
This can damage the sunroof.
Features of your vehicle
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be loaded
onto the roof rack. Distribute the
load as evenly as possible across
the crossbars (if equipped) and roof
rack and secure the load firmly.
ROOF
RACK
100 kg (220 lbs.)
EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Loading cargo or luggage in excess
of the specified weight limit on the
roof rack may damage your vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded onto
the roof rack. Avoid sudden starts,
braking, sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers or high speeds that may result
in loss of vehicle control or rollover
resulting in an accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn corners
carefully when carrying items on the
roof rack. Severe wind updrafts,
caused by passing vehicles or natural causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items loaded on
the roof rack. This is especially true
when carrying large, flat items such
as wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off the
roof rack and cause damage to your
vehicle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo
while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make sure
the items on the roof rack are
securely fastened.
WARNING - Driving with
roof load
Always drive slow and turn corners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. The vehicle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack.
4 177
Audio system
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• Steering wheel audio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• AUX, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Audio (With Touch Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
• Features of Your Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
• Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• SiriusXM Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
• Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
• Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• Voice Recognition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5
Audio system
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
If you install an after market HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
Antenna
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
(If equipped)
Shark fin antenna
OQL045447
OJF045127
The shark fin antenna will receive the
AM, FM broadcast signals and
transmit data.
The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the audio
controls, do not operate the
steering wheel control buttons
simultaneously.
5 2
Audio system
VOLUME ( / ) (1)
• Press the lever upward ( ) to
increase the volume.
• Press the lever downward ( ) to
decrease the volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different functions based on the system
mode. For the following functions the
button should be pressed for 1 second or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 1 second, it will
work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to change audio
source.
FM(1~2) ➟ AM ➟ SAT(1~3) ➟ CD ➟
USB (iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ MY MUSIC ➟
BT Audio ➟ FM...
In addition to mode change, Power
on/off can be made by pressing this
button when the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON.
- Power ON: Press the button when
the audio is off
- Power OFF: Press the button for
more than 1 second when the
audio is on.
MUTE (4)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone
call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
5 3
Audio system
AUX, USB port
Always use the USB charging cable
that has been certified by the phone
manufacturer. Use of aftermarket
cables is not recommended.
How Vehicle Radio Works
FM reception
OQL045449
You can use the AUX port to connect
audio devices and the USB port to
plug in a USB device or iPod®.
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
* iPod® is a Registered trademark of Apple
Inc.
5 4
OJF045308L
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
Audio system
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM reception
FM radio station
OJF045309L
OJF045310L
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
5 5
Audio system
JBM004
OJF045311L
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several
directions can cause distortion or
fluttering. This can be caused by a
direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from
two stations with close frequencies.
If this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.
5 6
Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING - Cell phone use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe and
legal location to use a cellular
phone.
Audio system
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
QLB50000EU
5 7
Audio system
Features of Your Audio
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD/USB(iPod®)/AUX
/My Music/Bluetooth® Audio mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order
of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My
Music ➟ BT (Bluetooth®) Audio.
(4) PHONE
• Changes to Phone mode.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
5 8
(5) PWR/VOL knob
• Power knob : Press to turn power
on/off.
• Volume knob : Turn left/right to control volume.
(6) SEEK TRACK
• When pressed briefly
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : changes the track,
Song(file)
• When pressed and held
- Radio mode : continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
(7) RESET
• Forced system termination and
system restart.
Audio system
(10) SCAN
• Radio mode : previews all receivable broadcasts for 5 seconds
each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes
: previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
(11) SETUP
• Changes to Setup mode.
(8) DISP
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
(9) CLOCK
• When pressed briefly : Display time
screen
• When pressed and held : Move to
the time setting mode
(12) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : turn to search Tracks/
channels/files.
(13) CAT/FOLDER
• SiriusXM Radio : Category Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder
5 9
Audio system
✽ NOTICE - Using Compact
Discs
• This device has been
manufactured to be compatible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc
back in its original case to prevent
disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damage
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances into the disc insert/eject
slot. Introducing foreign substances could damage the device
interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and
playing times may occur depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the recording
method used.
(Continued)
5 10
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a
soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also
result in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may
not properly operate depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
used. If problems persist, trying
using a different CD as continued
use may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CDRW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as Stype CDs may not function in the
device. DATA discs cannot be
played. (However, such discs may
still operate but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped
discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagonshaped) as such discs could lead to
malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds, the disc will automatically
be re-inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure. (e.g. copy CDR, CDs with labels)
Audio system
✽ NOTICE - Using the USB
Devices
• Connect the USB device after
turning on the engine. The USB
device may become damaged if it
is already connected when the
ignition is turned on. The USB
device may not operate properly if
the car ignition is turned on or off
with the USB device connected.
• Be careful for static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the vehicle's audio system
may not recognize the USB
depending on what firmware is
used by USB device or what files
are on the USB.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB
devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32
file formats. This device does not
recognize files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB
connector and bodily parts or foreign objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of USB devices within short
periods of time may result in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the
audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to
recognize the USB device may differ depending on the type, size or
file formats stored on the USB.
Such differences in time are not
indications of malfunctions.
• The vehicle audio system only supports USB devices designed to
play music files
• USB images and videos are not
supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Doing so may lead
to worsened performance or damage to the audio system.
• The audio system may not recognize the USB device if separately
purchased USB hubs and extension cables are being used.
Connect the USB device directly
with the USB port of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the root
drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
on the USBs.
• The audio system may not operate
normally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or other
electronic devices (USB devices
not recognized as portable disk
drives) are connected with the
audio system.
(Continued)
5 11
Audio system
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a typical USB memory device (miniature, keychain, etc.). For best
results, use a typical USB device
that has a metal case.
• The device may not support normal operation when using formats
such as HDD Type, CF, or SD
Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by connecting an Adaptor (SD Type or
CF Type) may not be properly recognized.
• The device may not operate properly when using USB HDDs or
USBs subject to connection failures caused by vehicle vibrations.
(e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
5 12
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products that
can also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB
jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various channels,
such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB
mode may result in pop noises or
abnormal operation.
Audio system
✽ NOTICE - Using an iPod®
• iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod® with
your vehicle's audio system, you
must use a dedicated iPod® cable.
(the cable that is supplied when
purchasing iPod®/iPhone® products)
• If the iPod® is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds immediately after connecting. If possible, connect the iPod® to the vehicle with the iPod® stopped/paused.
• When the vehicle ignition is set to
ACC or ON, connecting the iPod®
through the iPod® cable will
charge the iPod® through the car
audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an external device, such as the iPod®, and
the audio system are both active,
EQ effects could overlap and
cause sound deterioration and distortion. Whenever possible, turn
off the EQ feature within the
external device when it is connected to the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod® or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used,
disconnect the device for storage.
• When the iPod® or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your iPhone® is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone®, select the Dock connector or Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology to change the sound
output (source).
• iPod® mode cannot be operated
when the iPod® cannot be recognized due to versions that do not
support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod® Nano
devices, the iPod® may not be recognized when the battery level is
low. Please charge the iPod® for
use.
• The search/play orders shown
within the iPod® device may differ
from the orders shown within the
audio system.
• If the iPod® malfunctions due to
an iPod® device defect, reset the
iPod® and try again. (To learn
more, refer to your iPod® manual)
(Continued)
5 13
Audio system
(Continued)
• Some iPod® products may not
sync with the System depending
on the version. If the Media is
removed before the Media is recognized, then the system may not
properly restore the previously
operated mode. (iPad® charging is
not supported.)
• Use an iPod® cable shorter than 1
meter in length such as the one
originally supplied with a new
iPod®, longer cables may lead to
the audio system not recognizing
the iPod®.
✽ NOTICE - Using the
•
•
•
•
•
5 14
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only
when a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone has been connected.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones
that do not support this feature.
Wireless
If
a
Bluetooth®
Technology Phone is being used to
play music and receives an incoming or outgoing phone call, then
the music will stop.
Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises with some
mobile phones.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be supported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or
making an outgoing call while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio may result in
audio interference.
Audio system
✽ NOTICE - Using the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Cellular Phone
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including handsfree devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For
more information, visit the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
website at www.Bluetooth.com.
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Kia
is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners. A
Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device.
- Answering
and
placing
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio
• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
operations.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone will work
only when the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology option within your
mobile phone has been turned on.
(Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ
depending on the mobile phone.)
• Do not use a cellular phone or perform
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology,
the phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
has been deactivated. Disable the
hidden state or activate the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
prior to searching/connecting with
the car audio system.
(Continued)
5 15
Audio system
(Continued)
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area. (e.g. in a tunnel, in an underground area, in a
mountainous area, etc.)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to the audio
system. In this case, storing the
device in a different location may
resolve the condition.
(Continued)
5 16
(Continued)
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC
ON),
the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want
to automatically connect your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone, try the following.
1) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature in your
mobile phone.
2) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- To turn off the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature in
your car audio system, go to
[SETUP] > [Phone] and [turn
off] the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connection may become intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps
to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try
again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
try again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5) Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
(Continued)
Audio system
(Continued)
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not
be displayed correctly.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
• In some mobile phones, starting
the ignition while talking through
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• If the mobile phone is not paired
or connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit http://www.
kia.com/us/en/content/owners/blu
etooth.
✽ NOTICE
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone allows the user
to conveniently make calls, receive
calls, and manage the phone book.
Before using the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
WARNING
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device
excessively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time while
driving is dangerous and may
lead to accidents.
5 17
Audio system
✽ NOTICE - Using Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user’s manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any button other
than the
button will terminate
voice recognition mode.
• For optimal voice recognition performance, position your head
below the microphone above the
driver’s seat and maintain proper
position when speaking voice commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is
set to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
(Continued)
5 18
(Continued)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some time to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.
Audio system
Radio Mode
(1) Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
With the Radio Mode Button
Radio Mode Display Controls
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
(5) A.Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
Pressing the [RADIO] button will
change the operating mode in the
order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing
the [RADIO] button will display the
Radio Mode Pop up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
5 19
Audio system
A.Store(Auto Store)
Press the [A.Store] button to automatically save receivable frequencies to Preset buttons.
Seek
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
play the previous/next frequency.
Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the [Preset] button to display
the broadcast information for the frequency saved to each button.
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the
desired preset.
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons to save the current frequency to
the selected preset.
5 20
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to preview
frequencies with superior reception
for 5 seconds each.
Press and hold the [SCAN] button to
preview presets for 5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored. While
Scan is operating, pressing the
[SCAN] button will cancel the scanning.
Audio system
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3month trial subscription to the Sirius
Select package. You’ll get over 140
channels, including commercial-free
music, plus all your favorite sports,
exclusive talk, entertainment, and a
selection of premium programming. For
more information and a complete list
of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on a
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc.
If you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous states, DC and
Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
5 21
Audio system
SiriusXM Radio Mode
(1) Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
Radio Mode Display Controls
(2) Channel Information
Displays the category, channel number, channel name, artist and title
information.
(3) Preset
Displays current playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
(5) Info
Displays detailed information about
the current broadcast.
5 22
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number)/ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the
RID/ESN, turn on the radio, press
the [RADIO] button, and tune to
channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
Audio system
Seek
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
play the previous/next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previously played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the [SCAN]
button again will cancel the scan
operation and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the current category.
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
[CAT/FOLDER] button and press the
TUNE knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
✽ Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the [Preset] button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the
desired preset.
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold
one of the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons to
save the current channel to the
selected preset.
5 23
Audio system
Media Mode
Mode Display on the Status Bar
Media Mode Screen
When a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology,
iPod®, USB, or AUX device is connected or a CD is inserted, the corresponding mode icon will be displayed.
Icon
Pressing the [MEDIA] button will
change the operating mode in the
order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟
My Music ➟ BT Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing
the [MEDIA] button will display the
Media Mode Pop up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
The media Mode Pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.
5 24
Title
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CD
USB(iPod®)
AUX
Audio system
MENU : Audio CD
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
Audio CD Mode Display Controls
(3) Track Info
Displays information about the current track.
(4) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(5) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(6) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
(7) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
5 25
Audio system
With the Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track information is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next track.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button after the track has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
track from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button before the track has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
track.
5 26
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current track.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start playing.
Audio system
MENU : MP3 CD
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
MP3 CD Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays
the currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file.
(7) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
5 27
Audio system
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays all files within the current folder in shuffle
order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Repeat ➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
5 28
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
If there are numerous files and folders within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Audio system
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Searching Folders
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
5 29
Audio system
MENU : USB
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
USB Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
5 30
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option is set as the default display, the
folder name/file name are displayed
as detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa
tion are recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Audio system
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays the files in
the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Repeat ➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
✽ NOTICE
Copy function is only available
when music to be copied is in proper
format and can be copied.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and may result in
faulty list display or file search.
Normal operations will resume once
loading is complete.
The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
5 31
Audio system
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
5 32
Searching Folders
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.
Audio system
MENU : iPod®
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
iPod® Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the currently operating function.
(3) Song Index
Displays the current song/total number of songs.
(4) Song Info
Displays information about the current song.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuffle
order.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
5 33
Audio system
With the iPod® Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs
Once an iPod® is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod® song.
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
iPod® products with unsupported
communication protocols may not
properly operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next song.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button after the song has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
song from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button before the song has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
song.
Slight time differences may exist
depending on your iPod® product.
5 34
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
There are eight categories that can
be searched, including Playlists,
Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs,
Composers,
Audiobooks
and
Podcasts.
Category Menu
(1) Displays the play screen
(2) Moves to the iPod® root category
screen
(3) Moves to the previous category
If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod® device.
Audio system
MENU : AUX
AUX Mode Display Controls
Press the [MEDIA] button Select
[AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is disconnected, the previous mode will be
restored.
AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (camcorder,
car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not being
used, also remove the connector
jack.
When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
5 35
Audio system
MENU : My Music
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
My Music Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
5 36
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(10) Delete
Deletes the current file.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
Audio system
With the My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the [II] button to
pause and press [] button to play.
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] button before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
List Menu
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Selects all files.
(3) Deselects all selected files.
(4) Deletes selected files.
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the [Delete] button to
delete the selected files.
If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved. Identical
files cannot be copied more than
1,000 times.
To check memory information, go to
[SETUP] [System] [Memory
Information]
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
5 37
Audio system
MENU : Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will
automatically start.
While playing, press the [II] button
to pause and press [II] button to
play.
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
5 38
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the [SETUP] button [Phone] button
to display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.
If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button
once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device after converting
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
If streaming audio through Bluetooth
from a device, ensure the listening
volume on the device is turned up.
Audio system
Phone Mode
Making a call using the Steering
wheel controls
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command waiting state
When pressed and held
- Ends voice recognition
(2) Each time this button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2
➟ SAT3 ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio
If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding modes will be disabled.
(3) Used to control volume.
(4) Mutes audio volume.
(5) When pressed shortly
- Radio mode : searches broadcast frequencies saved to presets.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music/
BT Audio) modes : changes the
track, file or chapter.
When pressed and held
- Radio
mode,
automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards
the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be supported in some mobile phones.
(6) When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history
screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming
call screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting, switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
When pressed and held
- When pressed in the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on
the mobile phone, switches call
back to Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree (Operates
only when Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree is connected)
(7) Ends phone call
5 39
Audio system
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
When No Devices have been
Paired
➀ Press the [PHONE] button or the
[CALL] button on the steering
wheel controls. The following
screen is displayed.
➁ Press the [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
• Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
• Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
➂ From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
❈ SSP: Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device :
➃ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
5 40
SSP supported device :
➃ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
➄ Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.
Audio system
✽ NOTICE
If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the
[PHONE] button or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel controls displays the following screen. Press the
[Pair] button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a previously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Pair]
Pair Phone
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section “When
No Devices have been Paired” on the
previous page.
Paired Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone List]
• Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
• Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
Connecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the [Connect](1) button.
5 41
Audio system
✽ NOTICE
Disconnecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the [Disconnect](2) button.
Deleting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the [Delete](3) button.
5 42
• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
Changing Priority
It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology devices with the
car audio system. The “Change
Priority” feature is used to set the
connection priority of paired phones.
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
[Change priority](4) button from the
Menu. The selected device will be
changed to the highest priority.
Audio system
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
[PHONE] button to display the
Phone menu screen.
• Favorites : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts can be saved for
easy access
• Call History : Displays the call history list screen
• Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
• Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
• Setup : Displays Phone related settings.
✽ NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] button but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contact data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks
to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Favorites
• Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
• To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
• Delete All : Deletes all stored
favorite contacts
✽ NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
5 43
Audio system
Call History
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to
download the call history.
• Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
• Download : Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
5 44
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Contacts
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the [Download]
button to download the call history.
• Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contact
entries.
- Connects call upon selection.
• Sort by : Find a contact in alphabetical order.
• Download : Download contact entries.
Audio system
✽ NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if
Wireless
the
Bluetooth®
Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts
and call history saved to the phone
will be deleted if a paired phone is
deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth® streaming
audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the
contact download feature has been
turned off within the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
If downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth®
devices and function support,
refer to your phone’s user manual.
Calling by Dialing a Number
• Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
• Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number, If no
number has been entered, switches to call history screen
• End : Deletes the entered phone
number
• Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
5 45
Audio system
✽ NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
• Accept : Accepts the incoming call
• Reject : Rejects the incoming call
During a Handsfree Call
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
• Call time : Displays the call time
• End : Ends call
• Private : Converts to Private mode
• Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard
by the other party
• Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽ NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
5 46
Audio system
Voice Recognition Mode
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
button on the
steering wheel controls. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [ON]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[ON]/[OFF], go to [SETUP] [System] [Prompt Feedback]
For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
✽ NOTICE
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips
Help your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Voice Recognition performance by making a few simple
changes to your phone contacts:
• Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
• Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• Spell words completely, no abbreviations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
NOTE: Always wait for the beep
before speaking any commands.
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the
button on
the steering wheel controls.
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “Beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the
button on the
steering wheel controls.
The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep tone will
sound. After the “Beep”, say the
voice command.
5 47
Audio system
Illustration on Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button :
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Beep~
More Help
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button :
Please say a...
button :
(BEEP)
More Help
5 48
Ending Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button :
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Contacts
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Cancel
while guidance message is being stated
Shortly pressing the
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Audio system
Voice Command List
Common Commands
These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call <Name>
Call <Name>
on Mobile
Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be used
anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be used
within the current mode.
Calls <Name> saved in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Mobile” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Call <Name>
in Office
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts.
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name>
at Home
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name>
on Other
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone
Provides guidance on Phone related commands.
After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“Call
History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites
Displays the Favorite screen.
Command
Function
Call History
Displays the Call History screen.
Contacts
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this
command, say the name of a contact saved in the
Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number
Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this
command, you can say the number that you want
to call.
Redial
Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial
Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition
and Bluetooth® connections
Radio
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟SAT2➟
SAT3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)
Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)
Displays the FM2 screen.
AM
Displays the AM screen.
5 49
Audio system
Command
FM Preset 1~6
AM Preset 1~6
FM 87.5~107.9
AM 530~1710
Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in
FM Preset 1~6.
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the
current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
1~3
SIRIUS Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
0~223
Media
Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD
Plays music on the CD.
USB
Plays music on the USB device.
iPod®
Plays music on the iPod®.
My Music
Plays music saved in My Music.
5 50
Command
Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Mutes the sound.
Mute
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.
Audio system
FM/AM Radio Commands
Commands available during FM/AM Radio operation.
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
Function
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current present
and plays for 10 seconds each.
Satellite Radio Commands
Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite
Radio.
Command
Function
Channel 0~223
Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information
Displays the information of the current broadcast.
5 51
Audio system
Audio CD Commands
Commands available during Audio CD operation.
Command
Function
MP3 CD/USB Commands
Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.
Command
Function
Random
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random
Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current track.
Repeat
Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Plays the desired track number.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information
Displays the information screen of the current file.
Next Folder
Plays the first file in the next folder.
Track 1~30
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.
5 52
Audio system
iPod® Commands
Commands available during iPod® operation.
Command
Function
Random
Randomly plays the songs within the current category.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential
order.
My Music Commands
Commands available during My Music operation.
Command
Function
Random
Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.
5 53
Audio system
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation.
Command
Play
Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pause
Pauses the current song.
5 54
Audio system
Setup Mode
Press the [SETUP] button to display
the Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Calendar],
[Phone]
and
[System].
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Display]
You can select and control options
related to [Brightness], [Mode Pop
up] and [Media Display].
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day or Night
mode.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
• Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically.
• Day : Always maintains the brightness on high.
• Night : Always maintains the brightness on low.
Mode Pop up
This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the [RADIO] or [MEDIA]
button will display the Mode Pop up
screen.
✽ NOTICE
The media Mode Pop up screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
5 55
Audio system
With the Sound Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Sound]
You can select and control options
related to [Sound Settings], [Speed
Dependent Vol.], [Voice Recognition
Vol.] and [Touch Screen Beep].
Media Display
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
• Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name.
• Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song name.
Sound Settings
Use the [Up/Down/Left/Right] buttons to adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
5 56
Audio system
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
The volume level is controlled automatically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
Voice Recognition Volume
Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
Touch Screen Beep
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
5 57
Audio system
With the Clock/Calendar Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Clock/Calendar]
You can select and control options
related to [Clock Settings], [Calendar
Settings], [Time Format] and [Clock
Display].
Calendar Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.
Clock Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
Press and hold the [CLOCK] button
to display the Clock/Calendar
screen.
5 58
Time Format
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio system is turned off.
Audio system
With the Phone Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone]
You can select and control options
related to [Pair Phone], [Paired
Phone List], [Contacts Download],
[Auto Download], [Outgoing Volume]
and [Bluetooth System Off].
Pairing a New Device
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section
within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Connection” section within Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
(1) Moves to the previous screen
(2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/Disconnects currently
selected phone
(3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
(4) Change priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority
5 59
Audio system
✽ NOTICE - Before
Downloading Contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contact
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.
5 60
Downloading Contacts
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being downloaded.
Outgoing Volume
Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the [SEEK
TRACK] button.
Audio system
With the System Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[System]
You can select and control options
related to [Memory Information],
[Prompt Feedback] and [Language].
Memory Information
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
• Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
• Capacity : Displays total capacity
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not
be supported within the audio system.
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to [SETUP]
[Phone] and press “Yes”.
5 61
Audio system
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
• ON : When using voice recognition,
provides detailed guidance prompts
• OFF : When using voice recognition, omits some guidance prompts
5 62
Language
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition language.
If the language is changed, the system will restart and apply the selected language.
Audio system
iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital
device sold separately. The
Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under
license. SiriusXM services require
a subscription sold separately, or
as a package, by Sirius XM Radio
Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your
chosen payment method at thencurrent rates. Fees and taxes
apply. To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See
SiriusXM Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available
only in the 48 contiguous states,
DC and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a
trademark
of
Google,
Inc.
BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion
Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the
property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
5 63
Audio system
Declaration of Conformity
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
5 64
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 6-9
• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
All wheel drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection . . . 6-22
• For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
• AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) . . . . . . . 6-51
• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
• AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . . 6-54
• Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
• Sensor to detect the distance from the
vehicle in front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
• Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
• Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
• Downhill Brake Control (DBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
• Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . 6-68
• To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
• To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
• Drive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 6-93
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze
in system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 6-94
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
• Limitations condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 6-80
• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
• Conditions that cause the LDWS not to operate . . . 6-82
• Conditions that cause missed warnings and
false warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system does
not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change in
the sound of the exhaust or if you drive
over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in a
enclosed area for a prolonged
time. Exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless gas that can cause
unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
WARNING - Open liftgate
Do not drive with the liftgate
open. Poisonous exhaust gases
can enter the passenger compartment. If you must drive with
the liftgate open proceed as follows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
6 3
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
Necessary inspections
Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, at the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 8,
“Maintenance”.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any handled devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the drive should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
6 4
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause fire.
WARNING - Check sur-
WARNING - Loose
objects
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is dangerous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driving drunk.
roundings
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
6 5
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ignition switch
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
OQL055065
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
6 6
OQL055066
The ignition key can be removed only
in the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The electrical accessories are operative. If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC
position, turn the key while turning
the steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
The anti-theft steering column lock (if
equipped) is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for automatic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Ignition switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Key holder
Do not place small purses, multiple keys, or other heavy accessories on your vehicle key ring.
The driver can accidently push
these objects causing the ACC
position to change while in
motion and disrupt the proper
operation of some of the vehicle's safety features.
WARNING - Leaving the
Vehicle
To avoid unexpected or sudden
vehicle movement, never leave
your vehicle if the transmission
is not locked in the P (Park)
position and the parking brake
is fully engaged. Before leaving
the driver's seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged in
P (Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
Starting the engine
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots, sandals, etc.) may
interfere with your ability to use
the brake and accelerator pedal.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
6 7
Driving your vehicle
3. Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
6 8
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle is
still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before reengaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
Starting and stopping the engine for
turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving, requiring a heavy engine load,
run the engine on idle condition
about 1 minute before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so
may cause severe damage to
the engine or turbo charger unit.
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
Not illuminated
OQL055003
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the transmitter or the smart key, the light will
go off immediately.
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by
pressing
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
6 9
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
ON
Amber
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.
6 10
START/RUN
Super red
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
Not illuminated
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If
you
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button without depressing the brake pedal for automatic
transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the ENGINE START/STOP
button changes as follow:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON
position for a long time, the battery
will discharge.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
Starting the engine with a
smart key
1. Carry the smart key or place it
inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
Starting and stopping the engine for
turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving, requiring a heavy engine load,
idle the engine about 1 minute
before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so
may cause severe damage to
the engine or turbocharger unit.
6 11
Driving your vehicle
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
a message "key is not in the vehicle" will appear on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds. The
indicator or warning will turn off
while the vehicle is moving. Always
have the smart key with you.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.
6 12
OQL055004
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC position. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
+ (UP)
- ( D OW N )
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
OQL055007
6 13
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting from N (Neutral) to
a forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Leaving
Vehicle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Do not use
the P position in place of the
parking brake. Always make
sure the shift lever is locked in
the P position and set the parking brake fully. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the
brakes on. The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with the engine
power. Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and prevents the drive wheels from rotating.
6 14
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the vehicle” explained in this
chapter.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
Driving your vehicle
- Parking in N (Neutral) gear
Follow below steps when parking
and you want the vehicle to move
when pushed.
1. After parking your vehicle,
depress the brake pedal and move
the shift lever to [P] with the ignition button in [ON] or while the
engine is running.
2. If the parking brake is applied
unlock the parking brake.
- For EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) equipped vehicles, push
the brake pedal with the ignition
button in [ON] or while the engine
is running to disengage the parking brake. If [AUTO HOLD] function is used while driving (If
[AUTO HOLD] indicator is on in
the cluster), press [AUTO HOLD]
switch and [AUTO HOLD] function should be turn off.
3. While pressing the brake pedal,
turn the ignition button [OFF].
- For smart key equipped vehicles,
the ignition switch can be moved
to [OFF] only when the shift lever
is in [P].
4. Change the gear shift lever to [N]
(Neutral) while pressing the brake
pedal and pushing [SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE] button or inserting,
pressing down a tool (e.g. flathead
screw-driver) into the [SHIFT
LOCK RELEASE] access hole at
the same time. Then, the vehicle
will move when external force is
applied.
WARNING - Parking In
Neutral
• With the exception of parking
in neutral gear, always park
the vehicle in [P] (Park) for
safety and apply the parking
brake.
• Before parking in [N] (Neutral)
gear, make sure the parking
ground is level and flat. Do not
park in [N] gear on any slopes
or gradients. If parked and left
in [N], the vehicle may move
and cause serious damage or
injury.
6 15
Driving your vehicle
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower
gear.
6 16
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
+ (UP)
Manual
mode
- ( D OW N )
OQL055009
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual mode is selected
by pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
manual mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
• In manual mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
Driving your vehicle
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
OQL055010
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D position or
the manual mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
10 km/h (6.2 mph).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower than
10 km/h (6.2 mph), if you depress the
accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you shift the shift lever
from D (Drive) to manual mode and
shift it from manual mode to D (Drive)
again, the system changes from
manual mode to automatic mode.
With the shift lever in the manual mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
✽ NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you cannot
shift the gear.
6 17
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise & vibration near the
shift lever may be heard. It is a normal condition.
6 18
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OQLE055008
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screwdriver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
Driving your vehicle
5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
override access hole then install
the cap.
7. We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. Even if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
key cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with
ENGINE START/STOP button, the
button will not change to the OFF
position unless the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on
a steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards.
Shifting the shift lever into 2
(Second Gear) will help prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards.
✽ NOTICE - Kickdown
Mechanism
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transaxle
will shift to a lower gear depending
on the engine speed.
6 19
Driving your vehicle
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
Occasional off-road use such as
established unpaved roads and trails
are OK. It is always important when
traveling off-highway that the driver
carefully reduces the speed to a level
that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those conditions. In
general, off-road conditions provide
less traction and braking effectiveness than normal road conditions.
OQL055060L
■ Type B
* AWD : All Wheel Drive
FWD : Front Wheel Drive
OQL055060
Engine power can be delivered to all
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. AWD is useful when extra
traction is required on road, such as,
when driving on slippery, muddy
such as wet, or snow-covered roads.
These vehicles are not designed for
challenging off-road use.
6 20
The driver must be especially alert to
avoid driving on slopes which tilt the
vehicle to either side.
These factors must be carefully considered when driving off-road. Keeping
the vehicle in contact with the driving
surface and under control in these
conditions is always the driver's
responsibility for the safety of him/herself and his or her passengers.
WARNING - Off road
driving
Do not attempt to operate your
vehicle under extreme or challenging off road driving conditions. Although this vehicle has
off-road capability, it was not
designed to be driven off road.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If the AWD system warning light
( ) illuminates, this indicates that
there is a malfunction in the AWD
system.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Tight corner brake effect
✽ NOTICE - AWD
When turning sharply on a paved
road at low speed while in all wheel
drive, steering control will be difficult.
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of all wheel drive vehicles caused by the difference in tire
rotation at the four wheels and the
zero-degree alignment of the front
wheels and suspension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be
carried out with caution.
6 21
Driving your vehicle
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode
Selection button
Indicator light
AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
AWD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates similar to conventional FWD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels automatically without driver intervention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional FWD vehicles.
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to AWD AUTO mode
at speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.
✽ NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indicator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause
mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the
front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
6 22
Driving your vehicle
For safe all wheel drive operation
✽ NOTICE - All wheel drive
The conditions of on-road or offroad that demand all wheel drive
mean all functions of your vehicle
are exposed to extreme stress than
under normal road conditions. Slow
down and be ready for changes in
the composition and traction of the
surface under your tires. If you have
any doubt about the safety of the
conditions you are facing, stop and
consider the best way to proceed. Do
not exceed the ability of yourself or
your vehicle to operate safely.
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehicle.
HILL1
• When you are driving up or down
hills drive as straight as possible.
Use extreme caution in going up or
down steep hills, since you may flip
your vehicle over depending on the
grade, terrain and water/mud conditions.
HILL2
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of
steep hills can be extremely
dangerous. This danger can
come from slight changes in the
wheel angle which can destabilize the vehicle or, even if the
vehicle is maintaining stability
under power, it can lose that
stability if the vehicle stops its
forward motion. Your vehicle
may roll over without warning
and without time for you to correct a mistake that could cause
serious injury or death.
6 23
Driving your vehicle
• You must consciously take the
effort to learn how to corner in a
AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your
experience in conventional FWD
vehicles in choosing safe cornering
speed in AWD mode. For starters,
you must drive more slowly in
AWD.
• Drive carefully off-road because
your vehicle may be damaged by
rocks or roots of trees. Become
familiar with the off-road conditions
where you are going to drive
before you begin driving.
WARNING - AWD
Reduce speed when you turn
corners. The center of gravity of
AWD vehicles is higher than
that of conventional FWD vehicles, making them more likely to
roll over when you turn corners
too fast.
6 24
• Always hold the steering wheel firmly when you are driving off-road.
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
OQLE055127
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to impact
with objects on the ground. You
could also lose control of your
steering wheel while driving on
rough terrain.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind,
the vehicle's higher center of
gravity decreases your steering
control capacity and requires
you to drive more slowly.
Driving your vehicle
• If you need to drive in the water,
stop your vehicle, set your transfer
to the AWD LOCK mode and drive
at less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving
too fast in water, the water can
get into the engine compartment and wet the ignition system, causing your vehicle to
suddenly stop. If this happens
and your vehicle is in a tilted
position, your vehicle may roll
over.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
• Check your brake condition once
you are out of mud or water. Press
the brake pedal several times as
you move slowly until you feel normal braking forces return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in offroad conditions such as sand, mud
or water (see “Maintenance under
severe usage conditions” in section
8). Always wash your vehicle thoroughly after off-road use, especially
cleaning the bottom of the vehicle.
• Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the performance of the AWD vehicle is
greatly affected by the condition of
the tires. Be sure to equip the vehicle with four tires of the same size
and type.
• A full time all wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary
tow truck. Make sure that the
vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for moving.
WARNING - AWD driving
• Avoid high cornering speed.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at high speed.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over-steers to re-enter the
roadway. In the event your
vehicle leaves the roadway, do
not steer sharply. Instead,
slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
6 25
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow,
etc. the vehicle can sometimes
be driven out by depressing the
accelerator pedal further; however, do not run the engine continuously at high rpms to free
the vehicle from snow or mud
because doing so could damage the AWD system
6 26
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehicles are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. There
are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
WARNING - Replacement
tires
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in the tire
section
of
the
manual.
Installation of variant tires can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Jacked
WARNING - Dynamometer
vehicle
While the full-time AWD vehicle
is being raised on a jack, never
start the engine or cause the
tires to rotate.
There is the danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to go off the
jack and to jump forward.
testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. This
is very dangerous as the vehicle can jump forward and cause
serious injury or death.
OQL055051
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be
tested on a special four wheel
chassis dynamometer.
✽ NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake
while performing these tests.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not
be tested on a FWD roll tester. If a
FWD roll tester must be used, perform the following:
1. Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester (1) for a speedometer test
as shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller (2) as shown in
the illustration.
✽ NOTICE
When lifting up the vehicle, do not
operate front and rear wheel separately. All four wheels should be
operated.
✽ NOTICE
If you need to operate the front
wheel and rear wheel when lifting
up the vehicle, you should release
the parking brake.
6 27
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
6 28
CAUTION - Brake Pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking performance.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
Driving your vehicle
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
WARNING - Parking
brake
Avoid applying the parking
brake to stop the vehicle while it
is moving except in an emergency situation. Applying the
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
6 29
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake – Foot type
(if equipped)
Releasing the parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parked to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicles
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
Applying the parking brake
OQL055015
OQL055013
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
6 30
WARNING - Parking brake
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
Driving your vehicle
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Electronic parking brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
W-75
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is necessary.
OQLA055016
To apply the EPB (electronic parking
brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes
on.
6 31
Driving your vehicle
Also, the EPB is applied automatically if the Auto Hold button is on when
the engine is turned off. However, if
you press the EPB switch after the
engine is turned off, the EPB will not
be Applied.
✽ NOTICE
On a steep incline or when pulling a
trailer, if the vehicle does not remain
at a standstill, do as follows:
1. Apply the EPB.
2. Pull up the EPB switch for more
than 3 seconds.
6 32
Do not operate the parking brake/
EPB while the vehicle is moving
except in an emergency situation.
Releasing the parking brake
✽ NOTICE
A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
OQL055017
To release the EPB (electronic parking
brake), press the EPB switch while
doing the following:
• Have the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button in the ON position.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• The shift lever must be in P (Park).
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
Driving your vehicle
To release EPB (electronic parking
brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D
(Drive).
• Automatic Transaxle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine
hood and tailgate.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in R (Rear),
D (Drive) or manual mode.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
✽ NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage
the EPB even though the ignition
switch or engine stop/start button
is in the OFF position, but you
cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking
brake manually with the EPB
switch when you drive downhill or
when backing up the vehicle.
Do not follow the above procedure
when driving on a flat level ground.
The vehicle may suddenly move forward.
EPB (electronic parking brake) may
be automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
✽ NOTICE
If the driver turns the engine off by
mistake while Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be automatically
applied. (Vehicles equipped with
Auto Hold)
✽ NOTICE
If the parking brake warning light is
still on even though the EPB has
been released, have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and brake
rotor wear.
6 33
Driving your vehicle
System warning
If the above situation occurs, depress
the brake pedal and release EPB by
pressing the EPB switch.
WARNING - Parking
Brake Use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parked to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestrians.
OQLE055159
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but the EPB doesn't
release automatically, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the engine hood, driver's
door or trunk is opened, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
6 34
• A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet, make
sure to inform him/her how to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelerator
pedal, depress it slowly.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
System warning
Depress the brake pedal when the
above message appears for the Auto
Hold and EPB may not activate.
■ Type A
System warning
■ Type A
OQLE055079
■ Type B
OQLE055078
■ Type B
OQLE055073
OQLE055076
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold
is activated because of ESC
(Electronic Stability Control) signal, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
6 35
Driving your vehicle
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
OQL055059
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the system is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the ignition switch or the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ON position,
this indicates that the EPB may have
malfunctioned.
6 36
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
• The EPB warning light may illuminate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few minutes. The warning light will go off
and the EPB switch will operate
normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, have the
system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back up.
If the EPB warning does not go off,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency braking is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
WARNING
Do not operate the electronic
parking brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. Applying the electronic
parking brake while the vehicle is
moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control of
the vehicle. If you must use the
electronic parking brake to stop
the vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
✽ NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
If you notice a continuous noise or
burning smell when the EPB is used
for emergency braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
When the EPB (electronic parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normally, take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer by loading the vehicle on
a flatbed tow truck and have the system checked.
6 37
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
White
White
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driver brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal.
Green
6 38
OQL055018
OQL055019
1. Depress the brake pedal, start the
engine and then press the Auto
Hold button. The white AUTO
HOLD indicator will come on indicating the system is in standby.
Before the Auto Hold will engage,
the driver's door, engine hood
must be closed and the driver's
seat belt must be fastened.
2. When coming to a complete stop
by depressing the brake pedal, the
AUTO HOLD indicator changes
from white to green indicating the
AUTO HOLD is engaged and EPB
is applied. The vehicle will remain
at a standstill even if you release
the brake pedal.
3. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Driving your vehicle
4. If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in D (Drive) or
manual mode, the Auto Hold will
be released automatically and the
vehicle will start to move. The indicator changes from green to white
indicating the Auto Hold is in
standby and the EPB is released.
When driving off from Auto Hold by
depressing the accelerator pedal,
always check the surrounding area
near your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator pedal
for a smooth launch.
✽ NOTICE
Cancel
Light off
OQL055018
To cancel the Auto Hold operation,
press the Auto Hold switch. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.
To cancel the Auto Hold operation
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
press the Auto Hold switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
• The following are conditions when
the Auto Hold will not engage
(Auto Hold light will not turn
green and the Auto Hold system
remains in stand by):
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park) or R
(Reverse)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB
under any of the following conditions (Auto Hold light remains
white and the EPB automatically
applies):
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
6 39
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white, and a warning sounds and a
message will appear to inform you
that EPB has been automatically
engaged. Before driving off again,
press foot brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehicle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch.
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. Take your
vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.
If there is a malfunction with the driver’s door, engine hood open detection system, the Auto Hold may not
work properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
Warning messages
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
OQLE055078
■ Type B
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, do not activate Auto Hold
while driving downhill, backing
up or parking your vehicle.
6 40
OQLE055076
Parking brake automatically locked
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
■ Type A
■ Type A
When this message is displayed, the
Auto Hold and EPB may not operate. For your safety, depress the
brake pedal.
OQLE055079
■ Type B
OQLE055080
■ Type B
OQLE055073
OQLE055081
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
Press brake pedal to deactivate AUTO
HOLD
If you do not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
6 41
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
OQLE055082
AUTO HOLD conditions not met.
Close door, hood, and fasten seatbelt
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver’s door, engine
hood are not closed or the driver’s
seat belt is unfastened, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear on the LCD display. At this
moment, press the [AUTO HOLD]
button after closing the driver’s door,
engine hood and fastening the seat
belt.
6 42
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds
in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has different surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases
the stopping distance for your vehicle.
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the
force being delivered to the brakes.
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
Driving your vehicle
• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
W-78
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through selfdiagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS system is normal. Otherwise,
you may have a problem with the
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on at
the same time. This happens because
of low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
6 43
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
OQL055020
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.
6 44
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system
designed to help the driver maintain
vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed,
road conditions and driver steering
input can all affect whether ESC will be
effective in preventing a loss of control.
It is still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ESC is active.
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is functioning properly.
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
6 45
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
Indicator light
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
OQLE045234
■ Type B
OQLE045235
■ Type B
OQLE055085
OQLE055086
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF
)
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF
) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the traction control function does not operate. Brake control function only operates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine control function and brake control function do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
6 46
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Electronic stability control
Drive carefully even though your
vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control (ESC). It can only assist
you in maintaining control under
certain circumstances.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
✽ NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system operation.
6 47
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
WARNING - Tire/
Wheel size
When replacing tires and wheels,
make sure they are the same size
as the original tires and wheels
installed. Driving with varying
tire or wheel sizes may diminish
any supplemental safety benefits
of the VSM system.
6 48
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS- Electronic Power Steering).
This is only the effect of brake and
EPS control and indicates nothing
unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on a sloping road such as a
gradient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
✽ NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 22 km/h (13
mph) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu surface. A split-mu surface is made of two surfaces which
have different friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always follow all the normal precautions for
driving at safe speeds for the conditions – including driving in clement
weather and on a slippery road.
✽ NOTICE
For maximum protection, always
wear your seat belt. No system, no
matter how advanced, can compensate for all driver error and/or driving conditions. Always drive responsibly.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about 2
seconds. The brakes are released
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
The HAC is activated only for about 2
seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the accelerator pedal.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped on
an incline. While stopped, make
sure you maintain brake pressure sufficient to prevent your
vehicle from rolling backward
and causing an accident. Don’t
release the brake pedal until you
are ready to accelerate forward.
6 49
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at all
times. If the braking action does not
return to normal, stop as soon as it
is safe to do so and call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
6 50
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep
the vehicle from rolling.
If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on an
incline with the accelerator pedal.
This can cause the transaxle to
overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)
The AEB system is to reduce or to ✽ NOTICE
System setting and activation
avoid accident risk. It recognizes the
distance from the vehicle ahead or
the pedestrian through the sensors
(i.e. radar and camera), and, if necessary, warns the driver of accident
risk with the warning message or the
warning alarms.
WARNING
- Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Limitations
The AEB system is a supplemental system and is not a substitute for safe driving practices. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
speed and distance to the vehicle ahead to ensure it is safety
to use the AEB system.
Take the following precautions when
using the Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supplemental
system and it is not intended to,
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sensors
are limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or
while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situations
from occurring. AEB does not stop
the vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
System setting
OQLA055135
The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the ON
position and by selecting 'User
Settings', 'Driving Assist', and
'Autonomous Braking System'. The
AEB deactivates, when the driver
cancels the system setting.
6 51
Driving your vehicle
The warning light illuminates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. When the warning
light remains ON with the AEB activated, we recommend you to have
the system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
OQLA055136
OQLE045236
The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User
Settings in the instrument cluster
LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning
include the following:
6 52
• EARLY - When this condition is
selected,
the
initial
Forward Collision Warning
is activated earlier than
normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
Even though FCW is set in
early mode, if the vehicle in
front stops abruptly, the
FCW warning may be displayed later than anticipated.
• NORMAL - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward
Collision
Warning is activated normally. This setting allows
for a nominal amount of
distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian
ahead before the initial
warning occurs.
Driving your vehicle
• LATE - When this condition is
selected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This
setting reduces the amount
of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead
before the initial warning
occurs.
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB will activate activated when
the AEB is selected on the LCD display, and when the following prerequisites are satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is activated.
- The driving speed is over 6 mph.
(The AEB only works within a certain range of vehicle speeds)
- When the AEB recognizes a vehicle or the pedestrian in front. (The
AEB may not recognize every
obstacle or provide warnings and
braking in every situation, so do
not rely on the AEB to stop the
vehicle in instances where the driver sees an obstacle and has the
ability to apply the brakes)
• The AEB automatically activates
when you turn the vehicle on.
The driver can deactivate the AEB
by canceling the in the system setting on the LCD display.
• The AEB automatically deactivates
when canceling the ESC. When the
ESC is canceled, the AEB cannot
be activated on the LCD display.
WARNING
To avoid driver distractions, do
not attempt to set or cancel the
AEB while operating the vehicle.
6 53
Driving your vehicle
AEB warning message and
system control
Forward Warning (1st warning)
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
The AEB produces warning messages, warning alarms, and emergency braking based on the level of
risk of a frontal collision, such as
when a vehicle ahead suddenly
brakes, when there is no following distance from the vehicle in front, or
when it detects a collision with a
pedestrian is imminent.
6 54
OQLE055132
OQLE055133
The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB applies the brakes within
certain limit to reduce the impact
from a collision.
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking (3rd warning)
OQLE055134
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB controls the brakes within certain limit to release shock
from the collision.
The AEB controls the maximum
brakes just before the collision.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the driver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the accelerator
pedal, or when the driver abruptly
operates the steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear.
The driver should always exercise
caution when operating the vehicle,
even though there is no warning
message or warning alarm.
WARNING
The AEB cannot avoid all collisions. The AEB might not completely stop the vehicle before
collision, due to ambient weather and road conditions. The
driver has the responsibility to
drive safely and control the
vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
The AEB operates in accordance
with the risk levels, such as the distance from the vehicle/passer-by in
front, the speed of the vehicle/passer-by in front, and the driver's vehicle operation.
Do not drive the vehicle dangerously
to activate the AEB system on purpose.
6 55
Driving your vehicle
Sensor to detect the distance
from the vehicle in front
(front radar)
It may even temporarily cancel the
AEB. Always keep the sensor clean.
Warning message and warning
light
■ Type A
■ AWD
OQLE045237
OQLA055021
■ Type B
■ 2WD
OQLE055147
OQL055021
The sensor is to maintain a certain
distance from the vehicle in front.
However, the smudged sensor or
sensor cover with foreign substances, such as snow and rain,
adversely affects the sensing performance.
6 56
When the sensor is covered or the
sensor is dirty with foreign substances, such as snow or rain, the
AEB operation may temporarily stop.
In this case, a warning message will
appear to notify the driver.
Driving your vehicle
This is not a malfunction with the
AEB. To operate the AEB again,
remove the foreign substances.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC warning light.
System malfunction
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
• Do not install any accessories, such
as a license plate bracket or
bumper sticker near the sensor
area. Do not replace the bumper
by yourself. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance.
• Always keep the sensor/bumper
area clean.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Also, do not spray highly
pressurized water on the sensor
installed on the bumper.
• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the frontal sensor
area. When the sensor moves out
of the correct position due to
external force, the system may not
operate correctly even without the
warning light or message. In this
case, we recommend you to have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Use only the genuine Kia sensor
cover. Do not arbitrarily apply
paint on the sensor cover.
OQLE045228
■ Type B
OQLE055158
• When the AEB is not working properly, the AEB warning light (
) will
illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds.
After the message disappears, the
master warning light (
) will illuminate. In this case, we recommend
you to have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
6 57
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
The AEB is only a supplemental
system for the driver’s convenience.
The driver still maintains
responsibility to control the
vehicle. Do not solely depend
on the AEB system. Rather,
maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
lower the driving speed.
6 58
• The AEB may unnecessarily produce warning messages and warning alarms. Due to the sensing limitation, the AEB may not produce
warning messages or warning
alarm at all.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AEB, the braking control does
not operate upon detecting a collision risk even with other braking
systems normally operating.
• The AEB operates only for the
vehicle / pedestrian in front, while
driving forward. It does not operate
for any animals or vehicles in the
opposite direction.
• The AEB can not recognize crosstraffic or parked vehicles presenting a side-profile.
Limitation of the system
The AEB is an assistant system for a
driver in a certain risky driving condition and it does not take every
responsibility for all risks from driving
cnditions.
The AEB monitors the driving situations through the radar and the camera sensor. For any vehicle activity
occurring outside the sensor range,
the AEB may not function. The driver
should exercise caution in the following situations, as the AEB operation
may be limited:
Driving your vehicle
Recognizing vehicles
- The radar or the camera is contaminated with foreign substances.
- It heavily rains or snows.
- There is electromagnetic interference.
- Something in the path of travel
deflects the radar waves.
- The vehicle is in a construction
area or near a rail road and certain
metal objects are on the road.
- The vehicle passes a bumpy,
unpaved, or steep incline road.
- The vehicle drives into an underground or indoor parking lot.
- The vehicle in front has a narrow
body. (i.e. motorcycles and bicycles)
- The driver’s view is degraded by
driving towards sunlight, reflected
light, or darkness.
- The camera cannot see the full
profile of the vehicle in front.
- The vehicle in front is a special
vehicle, such as a heavily-loaded
truck or a trailer.
The vehicle in front does not turn
ON the rear lights, does not have
rear lights, has asymmetric rear
lights, or has rear lights out of
angle.
- The outside brightness is greatly
changed, such as entering/exiting
the tunnel.
- The vehicle driving is unstable.
- The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited.
OQL055053
- Driving on a curve
The AEB performance decreases
while driving on a curve. The AEB
may not recognize the vehicle in front
even in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.
While driving on a curve, exercise
caution, and, if necessary, depress
the brake pedal.
6 59
Driving your vehicle
OQL055054
OQL055055
OQL055056
While driving on a curve, the AEB
may recognize the vehicle in front in
the next lane and it produces the
warning message and activates as a
result. Exercise caution, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal.
Or, depress the accelerator pedal to
maintain the driving speed. Always
take a look around the vehicle for
your safety.
- Driving on a slope
The AEB performance decreases
while driving upward or downward on
a slope, not recognizing the vehicle
in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal.
- Changing lanes
Even though the vehicle in the next
lane enters into your lane, it may not
be recognized by the AEB, until it
enters the AEB sensing range.
Especially when the vehicle in the
next lane abruptly enters into your
lane, it is more likely not be recognized. Always be attentive to driving
conditions.
6 60
Driving your vehicle
Recognizing pedestrians
OQL055057
OQL055058
When the stopped vehicle in front
gets out of the lane, it may not be
recognized by your AEB. Always be
attentive to driving conditions.
- Recognizing the vehicle
When the vehicle in front has heavy
loading extended rearward, or when
the vehicle in front has higher ground
clearance, it may induce a hazardous situation.
- The pedestrian is not fully captured
by the camera sensor, or the
pedestrian does not walk in the
upright position.
- The pedestrian moves very fast.
- The pedestrian abruptly appears in
front.
- The pedestrian wears clothes similar in color to the background.
- Conditions outside are too bright or
too dark.
- The vehicle drives at night or in the
darkness.
- There is an item similar in shape a
person’s body structure.
- The pedestrian is small.
- The pedestrian has impaired
mobility.
- The pedestrian blends in with their
surroundings.
- Sensor recognition is limited by
rain, snow, fog, etc.
- There is a group of pedestrians.
6 61
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Testing the
AEB
The AEB does not operate in
certain situations. Thus, never
test-operate the AEB against a
person or an object. It may
cause a severe injury or even
death.
WARNING - AEB and
✽ NOTICE
Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
The system may temporarily cancel
due to the strong electric waves.
• Pay great caution to the vehicle in
front, when it has heavy loading
extended rearward, or when it has
higher ground clearance.
• The sensor only detects pedestrian, not carts, bicycles, motorcycles, luggage bags, or strollers.
OQL055117
Towing
Cancel the AEB in the User
Settings on the LCD display,
before towing another vehicle.
While towing, the brake application may adversely affect your
vehicle safety.
OQL055116
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
supports the driver come down a
steep hill without depressing the
brake pedal.
6 62
Driving your vehicle
It slows down the vehicle under 8
km/h
(5mph)
(for
automatic
transaxle) and lets the driver concentrate on steering the vehicle.
WARNING
Always turn off the DBC on normal roads. The DBC might activate inadvertently from the
standby mode when driving
through speed bumps or making sharp curves increasing the
risk of a crash.
✽ NOTICE
• The DBC defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.
• Noise or vibration may occur from
the brakes when the DBC is activated.
• The rear stop light comes on when
DBC is activated.
DBC operation
Mode
Indicator light
Description
Press the DBC button when vehicle speed is under
40 km/h (25 mph). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.
Standby
illuminated
Activated
blinks
Temporarily
deactivated
illuminated
The system does not turn ON if vehicle speed is over
40 km/h (25 mph).
In the standby mode, if vehicle speed is under 35 km/h
(22 mph) while driving down a steep hill, the DBC will
activate automatically.
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
OFF
• The DBC button is pressed again.
not
illuminated
• Vehicle speed is over 60 km/h (38 mph).
6 63
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
If the DBC red indicator light illuminates, the system may have overheated or have malfunctioned. When the
warning light illuminates even
though the DBC system has cooled
off, we recommend that the vehicle
be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
• The DBC may not deactivate on
steep inclines even though the
brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed.
• The DBC does not operate when:
- The shift lever is in P (Park).
- The ESC is activated.
Good braking practices
WARNING
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the Engine
Start/Stop button in the OFF
position.
Vehicles with the parking brake
not fully engaged are at risk for
moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
6 64
Driving your vehicle
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and we recommend that you
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.
6 65
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
OQLA055025
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (20
mph).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
6 66
✽ NOTICE
• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying
the brakes, the cruise control will
energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condition.
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient distance to the vehicle in front.
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
To increase cruise control set
speed:
OQL055027
OQL055026
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
3. Move the lever down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired
speed. The SET indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator at
the same time. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
OQL055028
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operated in this manner.
6 67
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the cruising
speed:
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with the cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
OQL055027
OQL055029
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operated in this manner.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an
Automatic Transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 20
km/h (12 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 km/h (15
mph).
6 68
Driving your vehicle
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move the
lever up (to RES+). You will return to
your previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30
km/h (20 mph):
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
OQL055026
OQL055028
If any method other than the
CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used
to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume
when you move the lever up.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want
to resume the cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in “To
set cruise control speed” on the previous page.
6 69
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
DRIVE mode
■ Type A
NORMAL
SPORT
ECO
❈ When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
OQL055032
■ Type B
OQL055033
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
6 70
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
ECO fuel efficiency by controlling certain engine and
transaxle system operating parameters. Fuel efficiency depends on the
driver's driving habit and
road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the ECO mode is
selected, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn
off the system, press the DRIVE
MODE button again.
Driving your vehicle
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced even though you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the Active Eco
System is activated to improve fuel
efficiency.
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited according to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on
SPORT dynamic driving by automatically adjusting the
steering wheel, engine
and transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT indicator
(yellow) will illuminate.
• When the SPORT mode is activated, and the engine start/stop button is turned off and on it will
change to NORMAL mode. To turn
on the SPORT mode press DRIVE
MODE button again.
• If the system is activated:
- While holding vehicle speed, it
maintains the gear and RPM for
some time even though the accelerator pedal is not depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽ NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.
6 71
Driving your vehicle
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 10 km/h (6
mph) faster than the other vehicle, the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
When a vehicle approaches you
at high speed, the system will
warn you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves rearward, and the sensor detects an
approaching vehicle in the left or
right side, the system will warn
you.
OQLE055064
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses toward the rear sides of the
vehicle and provides and early warning to the driver.
6 72
WARNING - BSD
Limitations
• Always check the road condition while driving for unexpected situations even though the
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) is operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemental system. Do not solely rely
on the system and always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing procedures. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes.
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. Vehicle speed is above 32 km/h
(20 mph).
3. Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side.
WARNING
OQL055034
The indicator on the switch will illuminate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds 32 km/h
(20 mph), the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the vehicle is turned off, the system
will remember the last settings upon
restart.
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
6 73
Driving your vehicle
1st stage
- The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
• To deactivate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
2nd stage
OUM054028
OUM054029
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in
detecting range, the warning will turn
off.
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
6 74
When the second stage alert is activated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror and an alarm
will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
✽ NOTICE
The alarm function helps alert the
driver. Deactivate this function only
when it is necessary
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
Warning message
OQL055049
OQLE045247
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
• This warning message may appear
when :
- There are foreign substances on
the rear bumper or inside the rear
bumper.
- The vehicle carries a trailer or carrier on the rear.
- Driving in rural areas with little traffic or open terrains such as wide
expanse of desert.
- There is heavy snow or rain.
To carry a trailer or carrier on the
rear, turn off the BSD. To turn on the
BSD, remove a trailer or carrier on the
rear.
The light on the switch and the system will turn off automatically.
When the message is displayed due
to a foreign substance, remove the
foreign substance on the rear bumper.
After the foreign substance is
removed, if you drive for approximately 10 minutes, the system will work
normally.
If the system does not operate normally after removing the substance or
is not in a situation mentioned above,
we recommend that you take your
vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer
and have the system checked.
6 75
Driving your vehicle
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
Operating conditions
OQLE055111
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.
The system will turn off automatically.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
6 76
OQL055063
OQLA055141
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in "User Settings" under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster. The system will turn on and
standby to activate.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the system off.
• If the vehicle is turned off, the
RCTA system will remember the
last settings upon restart. Always
turn the RCTA system off when not
in use.
Driving your vehicle
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below 11 km/h (7
mph) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is 0.5 m ~
20 m (1.6 feet ~ 65 feet) based on
the side direction. If the approaching
vehicle
speed
is
4 km/h (2.5 mph) ~ 36 km/h (22
mph) within sensing range, it is
detected. However, the system
sensing range can vary based on
conditions. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
Warning type
OQLE055130
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warning chime will sound and the warning light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected object is not in your
way, move the vehicle away from
the detected object slowly; and the
warning will cancel once the object
has been safely cleared.
• The system may not operate properly due to other factors or circumstances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
❈ If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by a barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing ability may be deteriorated.
OQLE055114
OQLE055115
6 77
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
• The system may not work properly if the bumper has been replaced
or if repair work has been done
near the sensor.
• The detection area differs according to the road's width. If the road
is narrow the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• If the road is very wide the system
may not detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic interference.
6 78
Limitations condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor cover
is dirty with rain, snow, mud, etc.
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or obstructed with foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle racks, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle has significantly changed such as when the
trunk is loaded with heavy objects,
abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A substantial amount of metallic
objects such as a construction
area.
- A large vehicle is nearby such as a
bus or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If two vehicles near each other
accelerate together.
- When another vehicle passes by at
a high rate of speed.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When another vehicle drives very
close to the back bumper/trunk.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
Driving your vehicle
- When the temperature of rear
bumper is very high or low.
- When bike racks, etc. cover the
sensor.
- When reversing from a parking
space with pillars or metal structures.
- When you are reversing and if the
detected vehicle is simultaneously
reversing.
- If there are small objects like shopping carts and baby carriages.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to another vehicle.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many plants.
- When driving on wet surface.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror housing is very dirty.
- The window is very dirty.
- The windows are tinted very dark.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
6 79
Driving your vehicle
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
This system detects the lane with a
sensor at the front windshield and
notifies you if it detects that your
vehicle leaves the lane.
OQL055030
OQLE055128
OQL055031
6 80
WARNING - LDWS Alert
The LDWS is a supplemental
system and only intended to
provide you with information
regarding your vehicle's position on the roadway. Upon
receiving an LDWS alert, you
must take the necessary steps
to maintain control of your vehicle. The LDWS does not provide
any steering inputs into the
vehicle for you. It can be dangerous to make a large sudden
steering input in response to an
alert, since that could result in
loss of control.
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the driver's responsibility to always check
the road conditions.
• If the sensor cannot detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 64 km/h (40 mph), the
LDWS will not be able to notify you
if the vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Prevent damage to the LDWS sensor from water or any liquid.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and avoid damaging the sensor by
avoiding strong impacts.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• The operation of the LDWS can be
affected by several factors (including environmental conditions). It is
the responsibility of the driver to
pay attention to the roadway and to
maintain the vehicle in its lane at
all times.
Driving your vehicle
To operate the LDWS, press the button with the engine start/stop button in
the ON position. The indicator illuminates white on the cluster. To cancel
the LDWS, press LDWS button again.
The indicator on the cluster will go
off.
■ Left lane departure warning
OQLE055151
OQLE055102
■ Right lane departure warning
If the system detects that your vehicle is leaving the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 64 km/h (40 mph),
the warning operates as follows:
OQLE055150
1. Visual warning
If you leave a lane, the lane you
cross will blink (yellow) and LDWS
indicator will blink green on LCD during max 3 seconds.
6 81
Driving your vehicle
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates for maximum 3 seconds.
The color of the symbol will change
depending on the condition of the
LDWS system.
- White color : When you activate the
lane departure warning system by pressing the LDWS button,
system operating conditions are not satisfied or the sensor does
not detect the lane line
- Green color : When you activate the
lane departure warning system by pressing the LDWS button,
system operating conditions are satisfied
and the sensor detect
the lane line
- Yellow color : when there is a malfunction with the lane
departure warning
system.
6 82
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
Warning indicator
Conditions that cause the
LDWS not to operate:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
or the hazard warning flasher to
change lanes.
• Driving on the lane line.
OQLE045242
✽ NOTICE
To change lanes, operate the turn
signal switch then change the lane.
OQLE055155
When the LDWS is not working properly, the warning light will illuminate
and the warning message will come
on for a few second. After the message disappears, the master warning
light will illuminate.
WARNING - LDWS
Limitations
The Lane Departure Warning
System is a supplemental system. Do not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention
and drive safely.
Driving your vehicle
Conditions that cause missed
warnings and false warnings:
• The lane is not visible due to snow,
rain, debris, puddles or other environmental conditions.
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly
such
as
when
entering/exiting a tunnel.
• The headlights are off at night or
the vehicle is in a tunnel.
• The color of the lane marking from
the road is difficult to distinguish.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street lights, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle lights reflect
off of water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is obscured
by debris.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
• The rear view mirror housing has
overheated from exposure to direct
sunlight.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indistinct.
• The windshield is fogged up by
humidity.
• Objects in the median or along the
side of the road cast shadows over
the lane markings
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the
dust/dirt.
• There are other markings similar to
lane lines.
• There are lane boundaries instead
of markings.
• The vehicle ahead is very close,
obscuring the view of the lane
markings, or the vehicle ahead is
driving over the lane markings.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
poor road conditions.
• The lanes are merging, expanding,
or otherwise overlapping
• Something reflective is placed on
the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construction.
• Lanes are marked by more than
two sets of lines.
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
6 83
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jackrabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
6 84
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
chapter 8. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see
chapter 8 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warmup period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off
during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for an engine
braking effect.
6 85
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
6 86
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use the second gear. Accelerate
slowly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other nonslip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an automatic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. SUV's have
higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of offroad applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher
center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the higher
ground clearance is a better view of
the road, which allows you to anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger
vehicles, any more than low-slung
sports vehicles are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended
to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. There are
steps that a driver can make to
reduce the risk of a rollover.
Driving your vehicle
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance,
narrower track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles.
• A SUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide safe
ride and handling capability. Do
not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from
the one that is originally
installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you
nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel
combination not recommended
by Kia for off road driving, you
should not use these tires for
highway driving.
6 87
Driving your vehicle
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an Automatic Transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.
WARNING - Sudden
Vehicle Movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if people or objects are nearby. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as it
becomes unstuck.
6 88
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Smooth cornering
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire damage.
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
OQLE055038
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving your vehicle
Driving at night
OQL055039
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
OQLE055040
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
6 89
Driving your vehicle
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
6 90
Driving in flooded areas
Highway driving
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for proper
inflation
before
driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death.
For proper tire pressures, refer to
“Tires and wheels” in chapter 9.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further information
and tread limits, refer to "Tires
and wheels" in chapter 8.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
6 91
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
6 92
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front of your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 8. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
chapter 9 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in chapter 8. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in chapter 8 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint finish.
6 93
Driving your vehicle
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, Automatic Transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.
6 94
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
If you are considering towing with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine their
legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask
an authorized Kia dealer for further
details before towing.
WARNING - Towing a
WARNING - Weight
limits
Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW (gross
combination weight), GVW
(gross vehicle weight), GAW
(gross axle weight) and trailer
tongue load are all within the
limits.
CAUTION - Trailer
trailer
Always check your towing
equipment to confirm correct
equipment size and installation
before use. Using incompatible
or incorrectly installed trailer
equipment can affect the vehicle operation and endanger you
and your passengers.
installation
Follow instructions in this section when pulling a trailer.
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.
You may require an additional wiring
harness connector to install a trailer
hitch. Please contact an authorized
Kia dealer for more details.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
This section contains many timetested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
6 95
Driving your vehicle
Hitches
Safety chains
Trailer brakes
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• Kia trailer hitch accessory is available at an authorized Kia dealer.
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to
your state’s regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the
maximum allowed weight without
trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
require its own brakes as well. Be
sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehicle's brake system.
6 96
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly set up the brake system. This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a
good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle
may also take longer to pass than it
would on flat ground.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects near the edge of the
road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance before
turning or lane changes.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
6 97
Driving your vehicle
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the
wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized Kia dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
6 98
CAUTION
Always use an approved trailer
wiring harness. Failure to use
an approved trailer wiring harness could result in damage to
the vehicle electrical system.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have an automatic transaxle, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
Driving your vehicle
Towing up hill
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant
temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the dial
towards “H” (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do so,
and allow the engine to idle until it
cools down. You may proceed once
the engine has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill. People
can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged if they unexpectedly roll downhill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
space. Turn the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb (right if
headed downhill, left if headed up
hill).
2. If the vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, place the vehicle in P
(Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off
the engine.
4. Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.
6 99
Driving your vehicle
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
6 100
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, automatic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake condition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
CAUTION - Air condition
Do not use the A/C while using
your vehicle to tow uphill. Due
to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
on hot days or during uphill
driving.
• When towing check transaxle fluid
more frequently.
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• Do not do any towing with your vehicle during its first 2,000 km (1,200
miles) in order to allow the engine to
properly break in. Failure to heed
this caution may result in serious
engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized Kia dealer
for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit,
etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with
weight:
For North America
Theta II 2.0L
T-GDI
Theta II 2.4L
GDI
Without brake
System
748 kg
(1,650 lbs)
748 kg
(1,650 lbs)
With brake
System
907 kg
(2,000 lbs)
907 kg
(2,000 lbs)
100 kg
(220 lbs)
100 kg
(220 lbs)
Item
Maximum
trailer weight
Maximum tongue weight
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
6 101
Driving your vehicle
Weight of the trailer
Tongue Load
Weight of the trailer tongue
Total Trailer Weight
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
C190E02JM
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how often your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
6 102
After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
WARNING - Trailer
Always follow the loading
instructions provided with your
trailer. Improper loading can
affect vehicle operation and
result in an accident.
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Tire and loading information label
OQLA055174/OQLA055173/OQLA055172/OQLA055171/OQLA055170
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.
6 103
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle capacity weight:
440 kg (970 lbs)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
6 104
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
* 2.0L T-GDI Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 748 kg (1,650 lbs)
With trailer brakes
: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)
* 2.4L GDI Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 748 kg (1,650 lbs)
With trailer brakes
: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
Driving your vehicle
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1,400 lbs.) and there will be five
68 kg (150 lb) passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1,400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sudden stop or crash.
6 105
Driving your vehicle
Example 1
A
Example 2
B
C
A
C190F01JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1,400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
136 kg
Weight
(300 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
Available Cargo and 499 kg
Luggage weight (1,100 lbs)
Example 3
B
C
A
C190F02JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1,400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
340 kg
Weight
(750 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 295 kg
Luggage weight (650 lbs)
B
C
C190F03JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1,400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
390 kg
Weight
(860 lbs)
78 kg (172 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 245 kg
Luggage weight (540 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
6 106
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go to
a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle
capacity
weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling--all of which may result in
a crash.
✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
6 107
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This chapter will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
6 108
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
If you have a flat tire (With Tire Mobility Kit). . 7-24
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 7-25
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 7-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 7-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 7-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 7-8
• Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Low tire pressure position telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
■ Type A
OQL066001
■ Type B
OQL066002
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme
caution
when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
7 2
It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
facia panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in
this section.
If the engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If
your vehicle will not start, contact
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
✽ NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall and if safe to do
so, wait at least 10 seconds to restart
the vehicle after it stalls. This may
reset the car so it will no longer run
at low power (limp home) condition.
7 3
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
7 4
WARNING - Push/
pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic converter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1. Check the fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start,
call an authorized Kia dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
Discharged
battery
1VQA4001
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION - Push/pull start
to 12 Volt Battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehicle, be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive.
7 5
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles
to come in contact.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2). Proceed to connect
one end of the other jumper cable
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other
end to a solid, stationary, metallic
point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near
any part that moves when the
engine is cranked.
7 6
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.
WARNING - Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative
terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and
crack, releasing battery acid.
Make sure to connect one end of
the jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery,
and the other end to a metalic
point, far away from the battery.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle lock system cannot be
push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it.
When the engine starts, the
vehicle can suddenly surge forward and could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine will probably be
too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (for
Automatic transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant
leaking from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is
running, keep hair,
hands and clothing
away from moving
parts such as the fan
and drive belts to prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized
Kia dealer for assistance.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the
radiator cap when the
engine is hot.This may
result in coolant being
blown out of the opening and cause serious
burns.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal. If coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to
bring the fluid level in the reservoir
up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
7 7
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the user settings mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to “User settings mode” in chapter 4).
Check tire pressure
✽ NOTICE
OQL066006
OQLE065036
OQLE065035
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
7 8
• You can check the tire pressure in
the information mode on the cluster.
- Refer to “User settings mode” in
chapter 4.
• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 minutes later after driving.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
to display” message displays. After
driving, check the tire pressure.
• The tire pressure may change due
to factors such as parking condition, driving style, and altitude
above sea level.
• Low tire pressure warning may
sound when a tire’s pressure unit is
equal or higher than nearby tires.
This is a normal occurrence, which
is due to the change in tire pressure
along with tire temperature.
• The tire pressure shown on the
dashboard may differ from the
tire pressure measured by tire
pressure gauge.
What to do in an emergency
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement, alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
7 9
What to do in an emergency
✽ NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure
indicator does not illuminate for 3
seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or engine
is running, or if they remain illuminated after coming on for approximately 3 seconds, take your vehicle
to your nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pressure position telltale
OQLE065035
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illuminated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
7 10
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
and the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may turn on and illuminate after
restarting and about 20 minutes of
continuous driving before you have
the low pressure tire repaired and
replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated if
the tire pressure was adjusted to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not mean
your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
What to do in an emergency
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or
lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation pressure.
When filling tires with more air, conditions to turn off the low tire pressure telltale may not be met. This is
because a tire inflator has a margin
of error in performance. The low tire
pressure telltale will be turned off if
the tire pressure is above the recommended tire inflation pressure.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Do not drive on low pressure
tires. Significantly low tire pressure can cause the tires to overheat and fail making the vehicle
unstable resulting in increased
braking distances and a loss of
vehicle control.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The low tire pressure telltale will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an underinflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate both
the TPMS malfunction and low tire
pressure position telltales e.g. if
Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS
malfunction indicator illuminates, but
if the Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear
Right tire is under-inflated, the low
tire pressure position telltales may
illuminate together with the TPMS
malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible to determine the cause of
the problem.
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if the vehicle is
moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitters
such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations,
airports, or transmitting towers,
etc. This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if snow chains
are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook
computer, mobile charger, remote
starter or navigation etc., are used
in the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
7 11
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will come on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
CAUTION - Repair Agents
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by Kia to
repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. The sealant not
approved by Kia may damage
the tire pressure sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
7 12
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will remain on until
the low pressure tire is repaired and
placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may illuminate
after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is inflated
again to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS
malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will turn off within a
few minutes of driving.
If the indicator has not disappeared
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If an original mounted tire is replaced
with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor
on the replaced spare wheel should
be initiated and the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel should be
deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel located in
the spare tire carrier still activates,
the tire pressure monitoring system
may not operate properly. Have the
tire with TPMS serviced or replaced
by an authorized Kia dealer.
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting stationary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
Never use tire sealant if your vehicle
is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure sensors.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors such as
nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the
road.
✽ NOTICE - Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for
that portion of the vehicle.
7 13
What to do in an emergency
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
7 14
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
Jack and tools
OQL065025
The jack and wheel lug nut wrench
are stored in the luggage compartment.
Remove the panel indicated in the
illustration.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire.
The jack should be used on a firm
level ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road, call a
towing service company for assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any
other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present
are in a secure place away from
the road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
7 15
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
Removing and storing the
spare tire
OQL065032
OQL065031
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
7 16
If it is hard to loosen the tire holddown wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack
handle.
Use caution when utilizing the sharp
jack handle.
What to do in an emergency
Changing tires (if equipped)
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle in
the correct jack position; never
use any other part of the vehicle
for jack support.
WARNING - Changing a
1VQA4023
1VQA4022
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park) with automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flashers.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack and spare tire from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
7 17
What to do in an emergency
OQL065026
OQL065029
OQL065028
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
8. Insert the wheel lug nut wrench
into the jack and turn it clockwise,
raising the vehicle until the tire just
clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 30 mm (1
in.).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
OQL065027
7. Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place
the jack at the designated locations under the frame. The jacking
positions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to line up with the jack.
7 18
What to do in an emergency
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Jiggle the wheel back and
forth until the wheel can slide over
the other studs.
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that there
is nothing on the hub or wheel (such
as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Insert the wrench into the jack
and lower the vehicle to the
ground by turning the wheel nut
wrench counterclockwise.
7 19
What to do in an emergency
OQL065030
Position the wrench as shown in the
drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.
Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on
the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go
around the wheel, tightening every
nut following the numerical sequence
shown in the image until they are all
tight. Double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
11~13 kg·m (79~94 lb·ft)
7 20
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed the wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
To prevent the jack, wheel lug nut
wrench and spare tire from rattling
while the vehicle is in motion, store
them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
Important - use of compact spare
tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
• You should drive carefully when
the compact spare is in use. The
compact spare should be replaced
by the proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
WARNING - Spare tire
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
80 km/h (50 mph). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possibly leading to personal injury or
death.
The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
7 21
What to do in an emergency
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
7 22
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic vehicle wash while the
compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle components may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
■ Example
• Type A
OHYK064001
• Type B
OHYK064005
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic
transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
7 23
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit because
the one supplied canister of sealant
in the Tire Mobility Kit is to only
enough sealant for one flat tire.
Introduction
WARNING - Tire wall
OQL065007
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
7 24
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.
Have your tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire may loose air pressure at any time after inflating with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
OQL065008
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails or
similar objects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer to have the tire
replacement.
What to do in an emergency
It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step procedure to temporarily seal
the puncture.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -30°C (22°F).
7 25
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
Do not use an aftermarket tire
repair kit (including sealant).
The aftermarket sealant may
lead to malfunction of the tire
air pressure sensor.
✽ NOTICE
Carefully remove any extra sealant
applied on the tire air pressure sensor and wheel after repairing the
tire.
OJF0650045
1. Speed restriction label
2. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
4. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
7 26
5. Holder for the sealant bottle
6. Compressor
7. On/off switch
8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
9. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
What to do in an emergency
10. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
- Detach the speed restriction label
(1) from the sealant bottle (2), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver
not to drive too fast.
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
OTAM061022
1. Thoroughly shake the sealant bottle
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Strictly
follow
the
specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
7 27
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION
If sealant is applied when the
valve is incompletely connected, the sealant may backdraft
and result in valve clogging.
OQLA065039
OQLA065010
2. Screw connection hose (10) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that button (9) on the compressor is not pressed.
4. Unscrew the valve stem cap from
the flat tire and screw the filling
hose (3) of the sealant bottle onto
the valve stem.
7 28
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200 kPa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
OJF065024
OQL065011
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor (5) so
that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7 Connect between compressor and
the vehicle power outlet (3) using
the cable and connectors.
8. With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 9). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later. Be careful
not to overinflate the tire and stay
away from the tire when filling it.
✽ NOTICE
If a visible foreign object has punctured the tire, do not remove it
before using Tire Mobility Kit.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve stem.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation is possible if
the engine is left running in a
poorly ventilated or unventilated location (such as inside a
building).
7 29
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or, about 10
min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be stained by sealant.
Therefore, remove the tire pressure
sensors and wheel stained by
sealant and we recommend that
inspect at an authorized Kia dealer.
7 30
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition switch on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pressure : Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting,
briefly switch off the compressor.
✽ NOTICE
OQLA065012
1. After driving approximately 4 ~ 6
miles (7 ~ 10 km or about 10 min),
stop at a safe location.
2. Screw the connection hose (10) of
the compressor to the valve stem
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire pressure reading, the
compressor needs to be turned off.
What to do in an emergency
- To reduce the inflation pressure: Press the button (9) on the
compressor.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors at an authorized dealer.
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle: 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight:
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume:
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
7 31
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
Towing service
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
AWD system.
dolly
dolly
OQL065013
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
7 32
On FWD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
WARNING - Side and
curtain Air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignition is
ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.
What to do in an emergency
OQL065016
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
■ Front
CAUTIO - Towing gear
position
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
OQL065017
■ Rear
OQL065015
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OQL065018
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the upper (front) / lower (rear) part
of the cover on the bumper.
7 33
What to do in an emergency
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
■ Front
OQL065019
■ Rear
OQL065020
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
7 34
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speed.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION
Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body of
your vehicle.
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or
chain to the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check if
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
steadily and with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.
WARNING - Emergency
Towing Precautions
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing hook
and towing cable or chain. The
hook and towing cable or
chain may break and cause
serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is
unable to be moved, do not
forcibly continue the towing.
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer
or a commercial tow truck
service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
OQL065021
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during towing.
7 35
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
7 36
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral.
Be sure the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in the
ACC position. A driver must be in
the towed vehicle to operate the
steering and brakes.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transaxle, limit
the vehicle speed to 15 km/h
(10 mph) and drive less than 1
km (1.5 mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle for fluid leaks
under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or a
towing dolly must be used.
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 8-20
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
• Recharging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 8-44
• Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8
• Inner panel fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
• Map lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
• Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
• Room lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
• Personal lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
• Glove box lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
• Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
• Bulb replacement precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
• Light bulb position (Front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
• Light bulb position (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
• Light bulb position (Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
• Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 8-80
• Headlamp (High/Low beam) bulb replacement. . . . 8-81
• Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . 8-82
• Position lamp + DRL bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
• Front fog lamp (Bulb and LED type) bulb
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
• Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
• Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85
• Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement . . 8-86
• Back-up lamp and Rear turn signal lamp bulb
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
• High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . 8-87
• License plate lamp bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
• Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb replacement . . 8-88
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
• Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system . . . . 8-100
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ THETA 2.4L - GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
■ THETA 2.0L T-GDI
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OQLE075095/OQLA075109
8 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factorytrained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
8 4
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is
provided in your Warranty &
Consumer Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the
engine while working under the
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially
rings, bracelets, watches, and
necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose
clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
8 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
8 6
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
roads.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
check the hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
8 7
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following
conditions
apply,
follow
the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of
less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal
temperature or less than 16 km (10
miles) in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low
speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,
unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other
corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
• Driving in heavy dust conditions
• Driving in heavy traffic areas
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or
mountain roads repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper,
or roof rack
8 8
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other
commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go
condition
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 240,000 km (150,000
miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - Turbo Models
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
Miles×1,000
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
ITEM
Number
12
6
10
Drive belts *1
Engine oil and engine oil
Theta II 2.0L T-GDI
filter
R
of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
At first, inspect at 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months,
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or 24 months
R
R
Fuel additives *2
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-
I
-
Add every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
Air cleaner filter
-
I
-
R
-
I
-
R
-
I
-
R
Spark plugs
Theta II 2.0L T-GDI
Replace every 70,000 km (42,000 miles)
Valve clearance *3
Theta II 2.0L T-GDI
Inspect every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
I
R
*1
*2
: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
: Replace or change.
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced.
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
3
* : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. Have an authorized Kia dealer perform the
operation.
8 9
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - Turbo Models (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving
INTERVALS Months
12 24 36 48 60 72
Miles×1,000 6
12 18 24 30 36
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
10 20 30 40 50 60
ITEM
Rotate tires
distance, whichever comes first
84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168
42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84
70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
180
90
150
Rotate every 10,000 km (6,000 miles)
Climate control air filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Vacuum hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
At first, replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years :
after that, replace every 50,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine coolant
Battery condition
Inspect every 12,000km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
Brake lines, hoses and connections
(Including booster)
Inspect every 24,000km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
Disc brakes and pads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Suspension mounting bolts
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner compressor
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Propeller shaft
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Exhaust pipe and muffler
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
8 10
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - Turbo Models (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
Miles×1,000
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
ITEM
Number
12
6
10
of months
24 36
12 18
20 30
or driving distance, whichever comes first
48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Intercooler, in/out hose,
Theta II 2.0L T-GDI
air intake hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cooling system
-
-
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
Without LSD
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
With LSD
-
-
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
Automatic transaxle fluid
Differential oil (rear) *5, *6
No check, No service required
Differential oil (front) (AWD) *
5
Transfer case oil (AWD)
No check, No service required
Vapor hose, fuel filler cap, fuel tank and canister
Fuel tank air filter *4
Inspect every 48,000km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*4 : Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*5 : Front/rear differential oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
*6 : When replacing differential oil with LSD, use only specified LSD oil.
8 11
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - Turbo Models (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
Miles×1,000
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
ITEM
Number
12
6
10
of months
24 36
12 18
20 30
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
or driving distance, whichever comes first
48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Inspect every 48,000km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
Parking brake
I
Brake fluid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cooling system hoses and connections
Inspect every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
Clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play
Inspect every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
All latch, hinges and locks
Inspect every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
8 12
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - Turbo Models
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and engine oil filter Theta II 2.0L T-GDI
R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6
months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter
I
More frequently
C, E
Spark plugs
R
More frequently
A, B, F, G, H, I, K
Automatic transaxle fluid
R
Every 100,000 km (60,000 miles)
A, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J
Front brake disc/pads, calipers
I
More frequently
C, D, E, G, H
Rear brake disc/pads
I
More frequently
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake
I
More frequently
C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/
Lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
I
More frequently
C, D, E, F, G
8 13
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
I
More frequently
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Without LSD
R
Every 120,000 km (72,000 miles)
C, E, G, H, I, J
With LSD
R
Every 60,000 km (36,000 miles)
C, E, G, H, I, J
Differential oil (front) (AWD)
R
Every 120,000 km (72,000 miles)
C, E, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R
More frequently
C, E, G
Propeller shaft
I
More frequently
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Drive shafts and boots
Differential oil (rear)
Severe driving conditions
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
8 14
E - Driving in heavy dust conditions
F - Driving in heavy traffic areas
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - Non Turbo Models
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
MAINTENANCE Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
INTERVALS Months
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000
7.5
15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
ITEM
At first, inspect at 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months,
Drive belts *1
after that, inspect every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine oil and engine oil
Theta II 2.4L GDI
filter
R
R
R
Fuel additives *2
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
I
I
Add every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
Air cleaner filter
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
Spark plugs
Theta II 2.4L GDI
Replace every 156,000 km (97,500 miles)
Valve clearance *3
Theta II 2.4L GDI
Inspect every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
I
R
*1
*2
: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
: Replace or change.
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced.
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*3 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. Have an authorized Kia dealer perform the
operation.
8 15
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - Non Turbo Models(CONT.)
MAINTENANCE Number of months or driving distance, whichever
INTERVALS Months
12 24 36 48 60 72 84
Miles×1,000
7.5
15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
12 24 36 48 60 72 84
ITEM
Rotate tires
comes first
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)
Climate control air filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Vacuum hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Coolant (Engine)
At first, replace at 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years,
after that, replace every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
Battery condition
Inspect every 12,000km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
Brake lines, hoses and connections
(Including booster)
Inspect every 24,000km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
Brake discs and pads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Suspension ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Propeller shaft (AWD)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
8 16
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - Non Turbo Models (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
INTERVALS Months
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
ITEM
Cooling system
-
-
-
I
-
Automatic transmission fluid
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
No check, No service required
Rear axle oil (AWD) *
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
Transfer case oil (AWD) *5
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
Fuel tank air filter *
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
Parking brake (Foot Type)
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
Brake fluid
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
5
4
Cooling system hoses and connections
Inspect every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
Clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free
play
Inspect every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
All latch, hinges and locks
Inspect every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*4 : Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*5 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
8 17
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - Non Turbo Models
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and engine oil filter Theta II 2.4L GDI
R
Every 6,000 km (3,750 miles) or 6
months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter
R
More frequently
C, E
Spark plugs
R
More frequently
A, B, F, G, H, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid
R
Every 96,000 km (60,000 miles)
A, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J
Brake discs and pads, calipers and rotors
I
More frequently
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake (Foot Type)
I
More frequently
C, D, G, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
More frequently
C, D, E, F, G
Suspension ball joints
I
More frequently
C, D, E, F, G
8 18
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Drive shafts and boots
I
More frequently
Rear axle oil (AWD)
R
Every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)
C, E, G, H, I, J
Transfer case oil (AWD)
R
Every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)
C, E, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter
R
More frequently
C, E, G
Propeller shaft
I
More frequently
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
MAINTENANCE ITEM
DRIVING
CONDITION
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Severe driving conditions
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in heavy dust condition
F - Driving in heavy traffic area
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
8 19
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter (for gasoline)
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a
lifetime fuel filter that integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance
or replacement is not needed but
depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like
fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc, fuel
filter inspection or replace is needed.
The fuel filter should be inspected or
replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
8 20
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
Cooling system
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant
reservoir, hoses and connections for
leakage and damage. Replace any
damaged parts.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Coolant
Valve clearance (if equipped)
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
8 21
Maintenance
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
reddish.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
8 22
CAUTION
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid.The use of a nonspecified fluid could result in a
transaxle malfunction and failure. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants and capacities" in
chapter 9.)
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. The level should
be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks
on the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
Maintenance
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
8 23
Maintenance
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS
When checking engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid,
always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant or fluid. This is especially important in dusty or sandy
areas and when the vehicle is used
on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
8 24
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
■ THETA 2.4L - GDI
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and reinsert it fully.
■ THETA 2.4L - GDI
WARNING - Radiator hose
OQLE075099
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
OQLE075103
■ THETA 2.0L T-GDI
■ THETA 2.0L T-GDI
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
CAUTION - Replacing
engine oil
Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
OQLA075110
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating temperature.
OQLA075111
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 9.)
8 25
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.
8 26
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year: at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder climate.
CAUTION - Radiator cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal injury
from escaping hot coolant or
steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise
to remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating,
do not remove the radiator cap or
the drain plug while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
8 27
Maintenance
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The
electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. it may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
8 28
OQLE075007
OQLE075008
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the coolant reservoir when
the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to MAX, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
■ Engine room rear view
Make sure the coolant cap is properly closed after refill of coolant.
Otherwise the engine could be overheated while driving.
■ Engine room front view
OQLE075073
2. Make sure that the tiny protrusions inside the coolant cap
should be securely interlocked.
OQL075072
1. Check if the radiator cap label is
straight In front.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze. This would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
8 29
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Ambient
Temperature
-15°C (5°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
-35°C (-31°F)
-45°C (-49°F)
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60
Water
65
60
50
40
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such as
the alternator.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth
around the radiator
refilling the coolant
prevent the coolant
flowing into engine
as the generator.
8 30
or fabric
cap before
in order to
from overparts such
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in the brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.
OQL075009
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX (Maximum) level. The level will
fall with accumulated mileage. This is
a normal condition associated with
the wear of brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 9.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Brake fluid
Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Brake fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly.
8 31
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
WARNING - Flammable
WARNING - Windshield
fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid reservoir is flammable under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
fluid
Do not drink the windshield
washer fluid. The windshield
washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
WARNING - Coolant
OQL075010
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
8 32
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control.
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
OQL075012
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 20 kg (44
lbs, 196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Stroke : 4~5 notch
8 33
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
OQL075016
OQL075015
OQL075014
1. Pull out the air cleaner cover.
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
OQL075017
2. Unlock by turning the locking lever
downward.
3. Pull the air cleaner filter to replace.
8 34
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)
CAUTION - Air filter
OQL075057
4. Pull up the lever (1) to the LOCK
position.
5. Rise up the cover (2) until the
hooks on the cover are securely
fastened into the latches (3).
6. Check if the cover is firmly
installed.
maintenance
• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
a non-genuine part could
damage the air flow sensor.
8 35
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
8 36
OQL075019
OQL075018
1. Open the glove box and remove
the stoppers on both sides.
2. With the glove box open, pull the
support strap (1).
Maintenance
OQL075020
OQL075021
3. Remove the climate control air filter cover while pressing the lock
on the left side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
8 37
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade inspection
1JBA5122
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield difficult to clean.
8 38
CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
Rear window wiper blade
1JBA7037
1LDA5023
OHM078062
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
1. Raise the wiper arm (1) and pull
out the wiper blade assembly.
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7038
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
8 39
Maintenance
OHM078063
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.
8 40
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
OQL075022
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
Keep batteries out of the
reach
of
children
because batteries contain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or working near a battery.
Always provide ventilation when working in an
enclosed space.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention immediately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to
an authorized Kia dealer to
be recycled.
Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.
8 41
Maintenance
WARNING - Risk of electrocution
Never touch the electrical ignition system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
shock you.
WARNING - Recharging
Battery
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
8 42
✽ NOTICE
Recharging the battery
If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use
unauthorized devices.
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for example, the headlamps or interior
lamps were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by
slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
Maintenance
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Driver position memory system
(See chapter 3)
• Audio (See chapter 5)
8 43
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
WARNING - Tire underin-
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
9.
8 44
OQL085002L
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
flation
Inflate your tires consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe underinflation
(70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can
lead to severe heat build-up,
causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
Maintenance
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After the vehicle has
been parked for at least three
hours or hasn't been driven more
than 1.6 km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
8 45
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
8 46
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
9.
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Without a spare tire
WARNING - Mixing tires
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
CBGQ0707A
• Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
8 47
Maintenance
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.
Tire replacement
✽ NOTICE
OUM076204L
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
Indicator (A) will appear as a solid
band across the tread. This shows
there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch)
of tread left on the tire. Replace the
tire when this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
8 48
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same which were originally supplied with the vehicle. If
not, driving performance could be
altered.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
Tire traction
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.
CAUTION - Wheel
Wheels that do not meet Kia's
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
Tire sidewall labeling
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
OJF085008L
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
8 49
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/55R16 89H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
8 50
89 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicles. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
W
Y
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
270 km/h (168 mph)
300 km/h (186 mph)
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1618 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2018.
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of
air pressure that should be put in the
tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to
the Tire and Loading Information label
for recommended inflation pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire. When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as
the factory installed tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 440
TRACTION A
TEMPERATURE A
8 51
Maintenance
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
8 52
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories
are,
automatic
transaxle, power seats and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi) before a tire has
built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
8 53
Maintenance
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
8 54
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68kg
(150 lbs.)
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Maintenance
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 2.3
kg (5 lb.) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.
8 55
Maintenance
All season tires
Snow tires
Radial-ply tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa
(4 psi) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h
(75 mph) when your vehicle is
equipped with snow tires.
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are
of belted construction and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
8 56
Maintenance
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
• When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
• If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000 km
(1,900 miles).
8 57
Maintenance
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see it, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on
a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information
on the tire sidewall.
8 58
Maintenance
FUSES
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse
■ BFT
OJF075021
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on
electric wiring to the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
❈ Left side : Normal , Right side : Blown
8 59
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
Inner panel fuse replacement
• When replacing fuse, turn the
ignition “OFF” and turn off
switches of all electrical devices
then remove battery (-) terminal.
• The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Electrical Fire
Always ensure replacements
fuses and relays are securely
fastened when installed. Failure
to do so can result in a vehicle
fire.
8 60
OQL075023
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
If the switch is located in the “OFF”
position, a caution indicator will be
displayed in the cluster.
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay, make sure the new
fuse or relay fits tightly into
the clips. Failure to tightly
install the fuse or relay may
cause damage to the wiring
and electric systems.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays
and terminals may not be fastened correctly which may
cause vehicle damage.
Maintenance
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the head lamp, turn signal lamp,
stop signal lamp, fog lamp, DRL, tail
lamp, HMSL do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
OQL075024
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
on the engine compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the headlamp, fog lamp, turn signal lamp, or tail lamp malfunction
even without any problem to the
lamps, have the vehicle checked by
an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
CAUTION - Fuse Panel
Covers
• Set all switches to ON before
driving.
• If the vehicle is going to be
unused for over 1 month, set
all switches to OFF to prevent
the batteries from draining.
• The contact points of the
switches may wear out with
excessive use. Please refrain
from excessive use of the
switches (except for long-term
parking for over 1 month).
8 61
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
OQL075025
Always set the fuse switch to the ON
position before using the vehicle.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly. When the switch is
Off, the caution indicator will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
Always place the fuse switch in the
ON position while driving the vehicle.
If the switch is located in the “OFF”
position, a caution indicator will be
displayed in the cluster.
8 62
OQL075026
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up. When the blade type
fuse is disconnected, remove it by
using the clip designed for changing fuses located in the engine
compartment fuse box. Upon
removal, securely insert reserve
fuse of the same rating.
After checking the fuse panel in
the
engine
compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover through the audible clicking sound.
If not, electrical failures may
occur from water contact.
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
Multi fuse
Main fuse
Do not disassemble nor assemble the
multi fuse when it is secured with
nuts and bolts. Incorrect or partial
assembly torque may cause a fire.
Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OQL075027
OQL075028
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reverse these steps to reinstall
the multi fuse.
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reverse these steps to reinstall
the main fuse.
8 63
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
The electronic system may not function correctly even when the engine
compartment and internal fuse
box’s individual fuses are not disconnected. In such case the cause of
the problem may be disconnection
of the main fuse (BFT type), which is
located inside the positive battery
terminal (+) cap.
Since the main fuse is designed more
intricately than other parts, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
8 64
CAUTION
Visually inspect the battery cap
to ensure it is securely closed.
If the battery cap is not securely
closed, moisture may enter the
system and damage the electrical components.
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Driver’s side fuse panel
OQL075029
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽ NOTICE
OQLA075037
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
8 65
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
MDPS
7.5A
MDPS Unit
MODULE 2
10A
Headlamp LH/RH
SMART KEY 1
10A
Smart Key Control Module/Immobilizer Module
A/BAG IND
7.5A
Instrument Cluster
[Audio & Manual A/C] Hazard Switch
[Audio & Auto A/C] A/C Control Module
[Navigation] Center Facia Lamp
MODULE 4
10A
Console Switch, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, AWD ECM, Crash Pad Switch, BCM, Lane Departure
Warning Control Module
A/BAG
15A
SRS Control Module
START
7.5A
[W/O Smart Key & IMMO.] ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay), Ignition Switch
[With Smart Key / IMMO.] Transaxle Range Switch, ECM, Smart Key Control Module
MODULE 3
10A
Front/Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, ATM Shift Lever ILL., Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, A/V
& Navigation Head Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/C Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector,
Adaptive Front Lighting Module
CLUSTER
10A
Instrument Cluster
MODULE 9
20A
PCB Block (Fuse - ABS 3, VACUUM PUMP 2, ECU 6, AEB, TCU 2, MODULE)
8 66
Circuit Protected
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
HEATED
STEERING
Circuit Protected
15A
BCM
MODULE 6
7.5A
Front/Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
MODULE 5
10A
BCM, Smart Key Control Module
A/CON 2
7.5A
A/C Control Module
MODULE 1
10A
BCM, ATM Shift Lever
P/ WINDOW LH
25A
Power Window Main Switch
A/CON 1
7.5A
A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)
WIPER RR
15A
Rear Wiper Motor, ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay)
WASHER
15A
Multifunction Switch
SMART KEY 3
10A
[W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module
[With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch
STOP LAMP
7.5A
Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
P/ WINDOW RH
25A
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch
8 67
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
MEMORY
10A
Wireless Charger, Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, BCM, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror
Folding/Unfolding Relay), Electro Chromic Mirror, A/C Control Module, Console Switch
SUN ROOF 1
20A
Panorama Sunroof
TAIL GATE
OPEN
10A
Tail Gate Relay
INTERIOR LAMP
10A
Ignition Key Ill.& Door Warning Switch, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH,
Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Luggage Lamp, Glove Box Lamp
SMART KEY 2
15A
Smart Key Control Module
MODULE 8
7.5A
Key Solenoid
MULTI MEDIA
15A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear USB Charger
S/HEATER
DRV/PASS
20A
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
SUN ROOF 2
20A
Panorama Sunroof
P/SEAT (PASS)
30A
Passenger Seat Manual Switch
8 68
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
POWER OUTLET
20A
Front Power Outlet #1 (Front Cigarette Lighter)
S/HEATER
REAR
20A
Rear Seat Warmer Control Module
DOOR LOCK
20A
Door Lock/Unlock Relay
4WD
20A
AWD ECM
MODULE 7
10A
Hazard Switch, Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, AEB Sensor
AMP
25A
AMP
SAFETY
P/ WINDOW
25A
Driver Safety Power Window Module
HEATED
MIRROR
10A
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
P/SEAT (DRV)
30A
Driver Seat Manual Switch
ACC
10A
Rear USB Charger, AMP, Power Outside Mirror Switch, PCB Block(Power Outlet Relay), Smart Key Control
Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, BCM, Wireless Charger
8 69
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
OQL075030
OQLA075031
8 70
Maintenance
Engine room compartment fuse panel
Fuse Name
MULTI
FUSE
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
COOLING FAN 2
80A
Cooling Fan Motor
MDPS
80A
MDPS Unit
B+ 1
60A
Smart Junction Block (IPS 2 (5CH), IPS 3 (2CH), IPS 4 (2CH), IPS 5 (2CH), IPS 6 (1CH), Fuse AMP)
B+ 2
60A
Smart Junction Block (IPS 1 (5CH), Fuse - MODULE 7, SMART KEY 2, SMART KET 3, MODULE
8, STOP LAMP)
B+ 3
50A
Smart Junction Block (Fuse - SUNROOF 1, SUNROOF 2, S/HEATER DRV/PASS, S/HEATER REAR,
SAFETY P/WINDOW, Power Window Relay)
BLOWER
40A
Blower Relay
REAR HEATED
40A
Rear Heated Relay
IG1
40A
[W/O Smart Key] Ignition Switch, [With Smart Key] PCB Block (PDM (IG1)/PDM (ACC) Relay)
IG2
30A
Start Relay, [W/O Smart Key] Ignition Switch, [With Smart Key] PCB Block (PDM (IG2) Relay)
8 71
Maintenance
Fuse Name
FUSE
8 72
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
B+ 4
50A
Smart Junction Block (Fuse - AWD, P/SEAT (DRV), P/SEAT (PASS), TAIL GATE OPEN, DOOR
LOCK, Leak Current Autocut Device Relay)
COOLING FAN 1
50A
Cooling Fan 1 Relay
ABS 1
40A
ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
POWER
TAIL GATE
40A
Power Tail Gate Module
ABS 2
40A
ESC Module
COOLING FAN 3
40A
Cooling Fan 1 Relay
E-CVVT 1
20A
PCM
E-CVVT 2
20A
PCM
WIPER FRT 1
30A
[W/O Smart Key] Ignition Switch, [With Smart Key] PDM (IG2) Relay
TCU 1
15A
PCM
WIPER FRT 2
10A
BCM, PCM
Maintenance
Fuse Name
FUSE
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
ECU 3
20A
PCM
HORN
15A
Horn Relay
BATTERY
MANAGEMENT
10A
Battery Sensor
SENSOR 2
10A
Fuel Pump Relay, Oil Control Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, RCV
Control Solenoid Valve
SENSOR 1
15A
Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
ECU 2
20A
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
ECU 4
15A
PCM
SENSOR 3
10A
E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Canister Close Valve
FUEL PUMP
20A
Fuel Pump Relay
AEB
10A
AEB Sensor
MODULE
7.5A
Stop Lamp Switch
8 73
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
B/ALARM
HORN
10A
E/R Junction Block (B/Alarm Horn Relay)
H/LAMP HI
10A
BI-Function H/LP Relay
ABS 3
10A
ESC Module
POWER
OUTLET 1
20A
Front Power Outlet #2
ECU 6
10A
PCM
TCU 2
15A
Transaxle Range Switch
B/UP LAMP
10A
Rear Bumper Lamp LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror
POWER
OUTLET 2
20A
Rear Power Outlet
ECU 1
30A
Engine Control Relay
DEICER
15A
E/R Junction Block (Deicer Relay)
VACUUM
PUMP 1
20A
Vacuum Pump
VACUUM
PUMP 2
15A
Vacuum Pump, Cooling Fan Motor, Vacuum Switch
FUSE
8 74
Maintenance
Relay
Relay Name
Type
Cooling Fan 1 Relay
MINI
Rear Defogger Relay
MICRO
B/A Horn Relay
MICRO
Deicer Relay
MICRO
Cooling Fan 2 Relay
MICRO
Start Relay
MICRO
Blower Relay
MICRO
8 75
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Battery terminal cover)
OQL075032
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OQL075033
8 76
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Bulb replacement precaution
Please keep extra bulbs on hand
with appropriate wattage ratings in
case of emergencies.
Refer to “Bulb Wattage” in chapter 9.
When changing lamps, first turn off
the engine at a safe place, firmly
apply the parking brake and detach
the battery’s negative (-) terminal.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
Use only bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION - Light replacement
Be sure to replace the burnedout bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION - Headlamp
Lens
To prevent damage, do not
clean the headlamp lens with
chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
✽ NOTICE
• If the light bulb or lamp connector
is removed while the lamp is still
on, the fuse box's electronic system may log it as a malfunction.
Therefore, a lamp malfunction
incident may be recorded as a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in
the fuse box.
• It is normal for an operating lamp
to flicker momentarily. This is due
to a stabilization function of the
vehicle’s electronic control device.
If the lamp lights up normally
after momentarily blinking, then
it is functioning as normal.
However, if the lamp continues to
flicker several times or turns off
completely, there may be an error
in the vehicle’s electronic control
device. Please have the vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer immediately.
8 77
Maintenance
If you don’t have the necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb. This is
especially true if you have to remove
the headlamp assembly to get to the
bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
If non-genuine parts or substandard
bulbs are used, it may lead to blowing a fuse or other wiring damages.
Do not install extra lamps or LEDs to
the vehicle. If additional lights are
installed, it may lead to lamp malfunctions and flickering. Additionally,
the fuse box and other writing may
be damaged.
Light bulb position (Front)
■ Fog lamp - Type A
■ Head lamp - Type A
OQLA075038
OQLA075039
(1) Headlamp (Low/High)
(2) Front turn signal lamp
(3) Day time running lamp
/Position lamp (Bulb type)
(4) Day time running lamp
/Position lamp (LED type)
8 78
OQLA075040
■ Fog lamp - Type B
■ Head lamp - Type B
OQLA075041
(5) Side marker
(6) Front fog lamp (Bulb type)
(7) Front fog lamp (LED type)
Maintenance
Light bulb position (Rear)
■ Rear combination lamp - Type A
■ License plate lamp
OQLA075042
■ Rear combination lamp - Type B
OQL075046
■ High mounted stop lamp
OQLA075043
(1) Tail lamp (BULB type)
(2) Stop and tail lamp (BULB type)
(3) Stop lamp (LED type)
(4) Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
(5) Side marker
(6) Rear turn signal lamp
(7) Back up lamp
(8) License plate lamp
(9) High mounted stop lamp
OQLE075084
■ Rear turn signal & Back up lamp
OQLA075044
8 79
Maintenance
Light bulb position (Side)
(if equipped)
Headlamp (HID type) bulb
replacement
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - HID
OQL075047
(1) Side repeater lamp (LED type)
8 80
Headlamp (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the HID headlamp
(XENON bulb) due to electric
shock danger. If the light bulb
does not operate, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
HID lamps have superior performance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer to
last twice as long or longer than halogen bulbs depending on their frequency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point in
the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than typical use will shorten HID lamps life.
HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immediately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lamping components are more complex than conventional halogen bulbs
thus have higher replacement cost.
Maintenance
Headlamp (High/Low beam)
bulb replacement
5. Install a new bulb-socket assembly in the headlamp assembly by
aligning the tabs on the bulb-socket with the slots in the headlamp
assembly. Push the bulb-socket
into the headlamp assembly and
turn the bulb-socket clockwise.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlamp bulb
OQL075058
OQL075049
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp
assembly.
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if broken.
8 81
Maintenance
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed in a
headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
replacement
OQL075050
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the
tabs on the bulb align with the
slots in the bulb-socket. Pull the
bulb out of the bulb-socket
8 82
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the bulb-socket and rotating it
until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp
assembly by aligning the tabs on
the bulb-socket with the slots in
the assembly. Push the bulb-socket into the headlamp assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Maintenance
Position lamp + DRL bulb
replacement
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the bulb-socket and rotating it
until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp
assembly by aligning the tabs on
the bulb-socket with the slots in
the assembly. Push the bulb-socket into the headlamp assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Front fog lamp (Bulb and LED
type) bulb replacement
■ Type A
OQL075052
OQL075051
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the
tabs on the bulb align with the
slots in the bulb-socket. Pull the
bulb out of the bulb-socket
■ Type B
OQL075053
If the front fog lamp (Bulb and LED
type) does not operate, we recommend that you have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
8 83
Maintenance
Stop and tail lamp bulb
replacement
OQL075059
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Open the service cover.
3. Loosen the light assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
8 84
OQL075060
OQL075061
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the rear combination
lamp connector.
6. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
Maintenance
9. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
10. Install the rear combination lamp
assembly to the body of the vehicle.
11. Install the service cover.
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement
OQL075063
OQL075062
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counter-clockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
8 85
Maintenance
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
8 86
Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
bulb replacement
Back-up lamp and Rear turn
signal lamp bulb replacement
OQL075069
OQLE075070
If the stop and tail lamp (LED) does
not operate, we recommend that you
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
If the Back-up lamp and Rear turn
signal lamp does not operate, we
recommend that you have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer
Maintenance
High mounted stop lamp bulb
replacement
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
OQL075064
OQL075071
If the high mounted stop lamp (LED)
does not operate, we recommend
that you have your vehicle checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
2. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket
by pulling it out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the bulb-socket.
5. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
OQL075065
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
8 87
Maintenance
Side repeater lamp (LED type)
bulb replacement
Map lamp bulb replacement
Vanity mirror lamp bulb
replacement
OQL075066
OQL075047L
If the side repeater lamp (LED type)
does not operate, we recommend
that you have your vehicle checked
by an authorized Kia dealer
8 88
If the map lamp (bulb and LED type)
does not operate, we recommend
that you have your vehicle checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
OQL075067
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
Maintenance
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lamp assembly from
interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
Room lamp bulb replacement
✽ NOTICE
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
✽ NOTICE
OQL075068
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
8 89
Maintenance
Personal lamp bulb replacement
✽ NOTICE
Glove box lamp bulb
replacement
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OQL075054
If the personal lamp (LED) does not
operate, we recommend that you
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
8 90
OQL075055
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lamp assembly from
interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
Maintenance
Tailgate room lamp bulb
replacement
✽ NOTICE
Be careful not to dirty or damage the
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OQL075056
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
8 91
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
8 92
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Maintenance
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
OJB037800
CAUTION - Wet engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.
Do not apply wax on embossed
unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the
unit.
8 93
Maintenance
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents containing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
8 94
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to the parts
repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Road salt and other corrosive chemicals are used in cold weather states
to melt snow and prevent ice accumulation. If these chemicals are not
regularly removed, they will corrode
the vehicle underbody and over time
damage fuel lines, the fuel tank
retention system, the vehicle suspension, the exhaust system, and
even the body frame.
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the winter
and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
Maintenance
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
• Use professional service technicians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for corrosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visually
aware of corrosion flaking or scaling or if you become aware of a
change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongey brakes,
fluids leaking, impairment of directional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the excellent quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
8 95
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
8 96
High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
Maintenance
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If necessary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks
should be cleaned up, flushed with
clean water and thoroughly dried.
8 97
Maintenance
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
8 98
Taking care of leather seats
• Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat.
It will prevent abrasion or damage of
the leather and maintain its quality.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
• Sufficient use of a leather protective may prevent abrasion of the
cover and helps maintain the color.
Be sure to read the instructions
and consult a specialist when
using leather coating or protective
agents.
• Leather with bright colors(beige,
cream beige) is easily contaminated and clear in appearance. Clean
the seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
Cleaning the leather seats
• Remove all contaminations instantly. Refer to instructions below for
removal of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic
products(sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
- Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated point.
Wipe off the cream with a wet
cloth and remove water with a dry
cloth.
• Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.)
- Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.
• Oil
- Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover for natural leather
only.
• Chewing gum
- Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Maintenance
Fabric seat cover (If equipped)
Please clean the fabric seats regularly with a vacuum cleaner in consideration of fabric material characteristics. If they are heavily soiled
with beverage stains, etc., use a suitable interior cleaner. To prevent damage to seat covers, wipe off the seat
covers down to the seams with a
large wiping motion and moderate
pressure using a soft sponge or
microfiber cloth.
Velcro closures on clothing or sharp
objects may cause snagging or
scratches on the surface of the
seats.
Make sure not to rub such objects
against the surface.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not properly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fireresistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.
8 99
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Consumer Information
manual in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery) system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
8 100
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poisoning.
8 101
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
8 102
Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
8 103
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 9-7
• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9
Specifications & Consumer information
DIMENSIONS
ITEM
Unit : mm (in)
4,480 (176.4)
1,855 (73.0)
2WD : 1,635 (64.4)
4WD : 1,645 (64.8)
2WD : 1,645 (64.8)
4WD : 1,655 (65.2)
Overall length
Overall width
Without Roof rack
Overall height
With Roof rack
Front
Tread
Rear
225/60R17
225/55R18
245/45R19
225/60R17
225/55R18
245/45R19
1,613 (63.5)
1,609 (63.3)
1,625 (64.0)
1,620 (63.8)
2,670 (105.1)
Wheelbase
ENGINE
Items
Displacement
[cc (cu. in)]
Bore x Stroke
[mm (in.)]
Firing order
No. of cylinders
9 2
2.0 T-GDI
2.4 GDI
1,998 (121.93)
2,359 (143.96)
86 x 86 (3.39 x 3.39)
88.0 x 97.0 (3.46 x 3.82)
1-3-4-2
4 In-line, DOHC
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb
Headlamps (Low)
Headlamps (Low) - HID type*
Headlamps (High)
Front turn signal lamps
Front Front position lamps
Daytime running light
Front fog lamps
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (Outside)
Rear tail lamps (Inside)
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (Outside)
Rear tail lamps (Inside)
Rear
Rear turn signal lamps
Back-up lamps
High mounted stop lamp*
License plate lamps
Map lamps
Room lamps
Interior Vanity mirror lamps
Glove box lamp
Trunk lamp
Bulb type
LED type
Bulb type
LED type
Bulb type
LED type
Bulb type
LED type
Wattage (W)
60
34
60
28
5
LED
28
LED
51
LED
28/8
8
LED
LED
27
21
LED
5
10 (LED)
10
5
5
10 (LED)
Bulb type
HB3
D3S
HB3
PY28/8W
W5W
LED
P28/8W
LED
9006
LED
P28/8W
P28/8W
LED
LED
PY27W
P21W
LED
W5W
W10W (LED)
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON (LED)
* : if equipped
9 3
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
Item
Full size tire
Compact
spare tire
Tire size
LI *1
Kg
Speed
capacity
SS *2 Km/h
Inflation pressure [kPa (psi)]
Normal load *3
Maximum load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
225/60R17
7.0JX17
99
775
H
210
240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
225/55R18
7.0JX18
98
750
H
210
240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
245/45R19
7.5JX19
98
750
H
210
240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
T135/90D17
4TX17
103
875
M
130
420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
T135/90D17
4TX17
104
900
M
130
420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
*1: Load Index
*2: Speed Symbol
*3: Normal load : Up to 3 persons
9 4
Wheel size
Load
Capacity
Wheel lug
nut torque
[Kgf·m
(lbf·ft, N·m)]
11~13
(79~94,
107~127)
Specifications & Consumer information
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make them work irregularly.
✽ NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 21 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
Tires typically loose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every -11°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are
expected, re-check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects
driving performance.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please
check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary.
Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 10.5 kPa (1.5 psi)/km
9 5
Specifications & Consumer information
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
Items
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
2.0 T-GDI
2.4 GDI
2WD
2,165 kg (4,773 lbs)
2,085 kg (4,597 lbs)
4WD
2,210 kg (4,872 lbs)
2,150 kg (4,740 lbs)
LUGGAGE VOLUME
ITEM
5 Seater
From flat luggage board : 798 L
From lower luggage board : 868 L
From flat luggage board : 1,565 L
From lower luggage board : 1,703 L
V7
SAE
V6
Min(V7) : Max Behind Second Seat
Max(V6) : Max Behind Front Seat
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Items
Refrigerant
oz. (g)
Compressor lubricant
oz. (cc)
Weight of Volume
Classification
550±25
R-1234yf
120±10
PAG30
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
9 6
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil * *
(drain and refill)
1
Volume
Classification
2
2.0 T-GDI
4.8 L
SAE 5W-30, API SM or above, ILSAC GF-4 or above,
ACEA-A5 or above.
2.4 GDI
4.8 L
SAE 5W-20, API SM or above, ILSAC GF-4 or above,
ACEA-A5 or above.
2.0 T-GDI
7.8 L
- ATF SP-IV
• The list of transaxle fluid approved by KIA: SK ATF SP-IV,
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV
2.4 GDI
6.7 L
- ATF SP-IV
• The list of transaxle fluid approved by KIA: SK ATF SP-IV,
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV
2.0 T-GDI
7.2 L
2.4 GDI
7.8 L
Recommends
Automatic transmission
fluid
Coolant
Brake fluid
385 ± 20 cc
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant for cooling
device)
DOT 3 or DOT 4
9 7
Specifications & Consumer information
Lubricant
Volume
Rear differential oil (4WD)
Transfer case oil (4WD)
Fuel
2.0 T-GDI
2.4 GDI
Classification
0.58 ± 0.05 L
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W/90 or equivalent)
0.35 ± 0.0175 L
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W/90 or equivalent)
62 L
Unleaded gasoline
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
9 8
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity
engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather performance; however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those
recommended could result in engine
damage. When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your
vehicle will be operated in before the
next oil change. Proceed to select the
recommended oil viscosity from the
chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
Temperature
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
2.4 GDI
50
120
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
20W-50
2.4 T-GDI
15W-40
10W-30
5W-30, 5W-40
An engine oil displaying this API Certification Mark conforms to the international Lubricant Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC). It is recommended to only
use engine oils that uphold this API Certification Mark.
9 9
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
■ Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
■ VIN label
OQL085001
OQLE085005
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the front
side wall of the engine room.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
9 10
OQLE085012
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
■ Gasoline engine (THETA 2.0L T-GDI)
OJF085005
■ Gasoline engine (THETA 2.4L GDI)
OQL085002L
The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
OUM084007
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
9 11
Index
I
Index
A
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system........3-43
Adding equipment to or modifying your air
bag-equipped vehicle ................................................3-69
Air bag warning label ................................................3-69
Air bag warning light..................................................3-46
Curtain air bag ............................................................3-61
Driver's and passenger's front air bag ........................3-57
How does the air bag system operate? ......................3-44
Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag..3-63
Occupant Detection System (ODS) ............................3-50
Side air bag ................................................................3-60
SRS Care ....................................................................3-68
SRS components and functions ..................................3-47
Air cleaner ....................................................................8-34
Filter replacement ......................................................8-34
Air conditioning system ..................................................9-6
All wheel drive (AWD)..................................................6-20
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection ......6-22
For safe all wheel drive operation ..............................6-23
Reducing the risk of a rollover ..................................6-26
Tight corner brake effect ............................................6-21
Appearance care ............................................................8-92
Exterior care................................................................8-92
Interior care ................................................................8-97
Audio (With Touch Screen) ............................................5-7
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ................................5-40
I 2
Features of Your Audio ................................................5-8
Media Mode ................................................................5-24
Phone Mode ................................................................5-39
Radio Mode ..............................................................5-19
Setup Mode ................................................................5-55
SiriusXM Radio Mode................................................5-22
Voice Recognition Mode ............................................5-47
Audio System ..................................................................5-2
Antenna ........................................................................5-2
Aux, USB port ..............................................................5-4
How vehicle audio works ............................................5-4
Steering wheel audio controls ......................................5-2
Automatic climate control system ..............................4-145
Automatic heating and air conditioning ..................4-146
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant........................................4-156
Climate control air filter ..........................................4-155
Manual heating and air conditioning ........................4-147
System operation ......................................................4-153
Automatic transaxle ......................................................6-13
Automatic transaxle operation ....................................6-13
Good driving practices................................................6-19
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) ......................6-51
AEB warning message and system control ................6-54
Brake operation ..........................................................6-55
Downhill Brake Control (DBC)..................................6-62
Good braking practices ..............................................6-64
Limitation of the system ............................................6-58
Index
Recognizing pedestrians ............................................6-61
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in
front (front radar)......................................................6-56
System malfunction ....................................................6-57
System setting and activation ....................................6-51
B
Battery............................................................................8-41
For best battery service ..............................................8-41
Recharging the battery ................................................8-42
Reset items ..................................................................8-43
Before driving ..................................................................6-4
Before entering vehicle ................................................6-4
Before starting ..............................................................6-4
Necessary inspections ..................................................6-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ..............................6-72
BSD (Blind Spot Detection)/
LCA (Lane Change Assist) ......................................6-73
Limitations condition ..................................................6-78
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)................................6-76
Brake fluid ....................................................................8-35
Checking the brake fluid level ....................................8-35
Brake system..................................................................6-28
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)....................................6-42
AUTO HOLD..............................................................6-38
Electronic parking brake (EPB)..................................6-31
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................6-44
Good braking practices ..............................................6-50
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ....................................6-49
Parking brake - Foot type ..........................................6-30
Power brakes ..............................................................6-28
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ........................6-48
Warning messages ......................................................6-40
Bulb wattage ....................................................................9-3
C
Checking fluid levels ....................................................8-24
Child restraint system (CRS) ........................................3-32
Children Always in the Rear ......................................3-32
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................3-36
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................3-33
Clean air ......................................................................4-161
Climate control air filter ................................................8-36
Filter inspection ..........................................................8-36
Cruise Control system ..................................................6-66
To cancel cruise control ..............................................6-68
To decrease the cruising speed ..................................6-68
To increase cruise control set speed ..........................6-67
To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) ............................6-69
To set cruise control speed..........................................6-67
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on ..6-68
To turn cruise control off ............................................6-69
I 3
Index
D
Declaration of Conformity ............................................5-64
IC ................................................................................5-64
Defroster ......................................................................4-134
Rear window defroster..............................................4-134
Dimensions ......................................................................9-2
Door locks......................................................................4-22
Child-protector rear door lock ....................................4-25
Impact sensing door unlock system............................4-25
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ............4-23
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ..........4-22
Drive mode integrated control system ..........................6-70
Drive mode..................................................................6-70
E
Economical operation ....................................................6-84
Emergency starting ..........................................................7-5
Jump starting ................................................................7-5
Push-starting ................................................................7-6
Emission control system..............................................8-100
Crankcase emission control system ..........................8-100
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system ........8-100
Exhaust emission control system..............................8-101
Engine ..............................................................................9-2
Engine compartment ................................................2-6, 8-3
I 4
Engine coolant ..............................................................8-27
Changing the coolant ..................................................8-30
Checking the coolant level..........................................8-27
Engine number ..............................................................9-11
Engine oil ......................................................................8-25
Changing the engine oil and filter ..............................8-26
Checking the engine oil level ....................................8-25
ENGINE START/STOP button ......................................6-9
ENGINE START/STOP button position ......................6-9
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button ................6-9
Starting the engine with a smart key ..........................6-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............8-20
Exterior features ..........................................................4-176
Roof rack ..................................................................4-176
Exterior overview ....................................................2-2, 2-3
F
Folding key ......................................................................4-5
Battery replacement ......................................................4-8
Immobilizer system ......................................................4-9
Key operations ..............................................................4-5
Record your key number ..............................................4-5
Transmitter precautions ................................................4-7
Fuel filler lid ..................................................................4-45
Closing the fuel filler lid ............................................4-45
Opening the fuel filler lid ..........................................4-45
Fuel requirements ............................................................1-2
Index
Do not use methanol ....................................................1-4
Fuel Additives ..............................................................1-4
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol ..................1-3
Operation in foreign countries ......................................1-5
Fuses ..............................................................................8-59
Engine compartment fuse replacement ......................8-62
Fuse/relay panel description ......................................8-65
Inner panel fuse replacement ......................................8-60
G
Gross vehicle weight........................................................9-6
H
Hood ..............................................................................4-43
Closing the hood ........................................................4-44
Opening the hood ......................................................4-43
How to use this manual ..................................................1-2
I
If the engine overheats ....................................................7-7
If the engine will not start ..............................................7-4
If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly ..........7-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start ..........7-4
If you have a flat tire ....................................................7-15
Changing tires ............................................................7-17
Jack and tools..............................................................7-15
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................7-16
If you have a flat tire (With Tire Mobility Kit) ............7-24
Checking the tire inflation pressure............................7-30
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit ........................7-26
Distributing the sealant ..............................................7-30
Introduction ................................................................7-24
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit ..........7-25
Technical Data ............................................................7-31
Using the Tire Mobility Kit ........................................7-27
Important safety precautions ..........................................3-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................3-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................3-2
Control your speed ......................................................3-3
Driver distraction ..........................................................3-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................3-3
Restrain all children ......................................................3-2
In case of an emergency while driving............................7-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ..............7-3
If the engine stalls while driving ..................................7-3
If you have a flat tire while driving ..............................7-3
Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-69
Gauges ........................................................................4-71
Instrument Cluster Control ........................................4-70
LCD Display Control..................................................4-70
Transaxle Shift Indicator ............................................4-74
Instrument panel overview ..............................................2-5
Interior features............................................................4-165
I 5
Index
Air ventilation seat....................................................4-167
Bottle holder ............................................................4-165
Cargo security screen................................................4-175
Clothes hanger ..........................................................4-173
Cup holder ................................................................4-165
Floor mat anchor (s)..................................................4-173
Luggage net holder ..................................................4-174
Power outlet ..............................................................4-168
Seat warmer ..............................................................4-166
Sunvisor ....................................................................4-167
USB charger..............................................................4-169
Wireless smart phone charging system ....................4-170
Interior lights ..............................................................4-130
Automatic turn off function ......................................4-130
Glove box lamp ........................................................4-132
Liftgate room lamp ..................................................4-132
Map lamp ................................................................4-131
Room lamp................................................................4-130
Vanity mirror lamp....................................................4-132
Interior overview..............................................................2-4
K
Key positions ..................................................................6-6
Ignition switch position ................................................6-6
Illuminated ignition switch ..........................................6-6
Starting the engine ........................................................6-7
I 6
L
Lane departure warning system (LDWS)......................6-80
Conditions that cause missed warnings and
false warnings ..........................................................6-83
Conditions that cause the LDWS not to operate ........6-82
Warning indicator ......................................................6-82
LCD Display..................................................................4-75
LCD Modes ................................................................4-75
Service Mode ..............................................................4-76
User Settings Mode ....................................................4-78
Liftgate (for manual liftgate) ........................................4-26
Closing the liftgate......................................................4-26
Emergency liftgate safety release ..............................4-27
Opening the liftgate ....................................................4-26
Light bulbs ....................................................................8-77
Back-up lamp and Rear turn signal lamp bulb
replacement ..............................................................8-86
Bulb replacement precaution ......................................8-77
Front fog lamp (Bulb and LED type) bulb
replacement ..............................................................8-83
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement....................8-82
Glove box lamp bulb replacement ..............................8-90
Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement ....................8-80
Headlamp (High/Low beam) bulb replacement..........8-81
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement................8-87
License plate lamp bulb Replacement ........................8-87
Light bulb position (Front) ........................................8-78
Index
Light bulb position (Rear) ..........................................8-79
Light bulb position (Side) ..........................................8-80
Map lamp bulb replacement ......................................8-88
Personal lamp bulb replacement ................................8-90
Position lamp + DRL bulb replacement ....................8-83
Room lamp bulb replacement ....................................8-89
Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb replacement ......8-88
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement ......8-86
Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement ..........................8-84
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement ..........................8-85
Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement ........................8-91
Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement ........................8-88
Lighting........................................................................4-119
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) ................4-125
Battery saver function ..............................................4-119
Check headlight ........................................................4-125
Daytime running light ..............................................4-119
Front fog light ..........................................................4-124
High Beam Assist ....................................................4-122
High beam operation ................................................4-121
Lighting control ........................................................4-119
Turn signals and lane change signals........................4-124
Luggage volume ..............................................................9-6
M
Maintenance services ......................................................8-4
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................8-5
Owner’s responsibility ..................................................8-4
Manual climate control system....................................4-135
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant........................................4-143
Climate control air filter ..........................................4-143
Heating and air conditioning ....................................4-136
System operation ......................................................4-141
Mirrors ..........................................................................4-58
Inside rearview mirror ................................................4-58
Outside rearview mirror..............................................4-65
O
Owner maintenance ........................................................8-6
Owner maintenance schedule ......................................8-6
P
Panoramic sunroof ........................................................4-48
Closing the sunroof ....................................................4-52
Resetting the sunroof ..................................................4-52
Sliding the sunroof ....................................................4-50
Sunroof open warning ................................................4-49
Sunshade ....................................................................4-49
Tilting the sunroof ....................................................4-52
Parking assist system ..................................................4-113
Non-operational conditions of parking assist system..4-115
Operation of the parking assist system ....................4-113
I 7
Index
Self-diagnosis............................................................4-117
Parking brake ................................................................8-33
Checking the parking brake ........................................8-33
Power liftgate ................................................................4-28
Closing the liftgate......................................................4-30
Opening the liftgate ....................................................4-29
Smart Power Liftgate ..................................................4-33
R
Rear parking assist system ..........................................4-109
Non-operational conditions of rear
parking assist system ..............................................4-110
Operation of the rear parking assist system..............4-109
Rear parking assist system precautions ....................4-111
Self-diagnosis............................................................4-112
Rearview camera..........................................................4-118
Recommended lubricants and capacities ........................9-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number ........................9-9
Road warning ..................................................................7-2
Hazard warning flasher ................................................7-2
S
Scheduled maintenance service ......................................8-8
Seat ..................................................................................3-4
Front seat adjustment - manual ....................................3-7
Front seat adjustment - power ......................................3-9
I 8
Headrest (for front seat)..............................................3-11
Rear seat adjustment ..................................................3-14
Seatback pocket ..........................................................3-14
Seat belts........................................................................3-19
Care of seat belts ........................................................3-31
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................3-26
Seat belt precautions ..................................................3-29
Seat belt restraint system ............................................3-19
Smart key ......................................................................4-12
Battery replacement ....................................................4-17
Loss of the smart key..................................................4-16
Record your key number ............................................4-12
Smart key function......................................................4-12
Smart key immobilizer system ..................................4-18
Smart key precautions ................................................4-16
Special driving conditions ............................................6-86
Driving at night ..........................................................6-89
Driving in flooded areas ............................................6-90
Driving in the rain ......................................................6-89
Driving off-road ..........................................................6-90
Hazardous driving conditions ....................................6-86
Highway driving ........................................................6-90
Reducing the risk of a rollover ..................................6-86
Rocking the vehicle ....................................................6-88
Smooth cornering........................................................6-88
Index
Steering wheel ..............................................................4-54
Electronic power steering (EPS) ................................4-54
Heated steering wheel ................................................4-56
Horn ............................................................................4-57
Tilt and telescopic steering ........................................4-55
Storage compartments ................................................4-162
Center console storage ..............................................4-162
Glove box..................................................................4-162
Luggage box..............................................................4-163
Sunglass holder ........................................................4-163
Two types of luggage board use ..............................4-164
T
Theft-alarm system ........................................................4-19
Armed stage ................................................................4-19
Disarmed stage............................................................4-20
Theft-alarm stage ........................................................4-20
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)......................7-8
Changing a tire with TPMS ........................................7-12
Check tire pressure........................................................7-8
Low tire pressure position telltale ..............................7-10
Low tire pressure telltale ............................................7-10
Tire specification and pressure label ............................9-11
Tires and wheels ............................................................8-44
Tires and wheels ..............................................................9-4
All season tires............................................................8-60
Checking tire inflation pressure..................................8-45
Low aspect ratio tire ..................................................8-57
Radial-ply tires............................................................8-56
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures................8-44
Snow tires....................................................................8-56
Summer tires ..............................................................8-56
Tire care ......................................................................8-44
Tire maintenance ........................................................8-49
Tire pressure................................................................8-45
Tire replacement ........................................................8-48
Tire rotation ................................................................8-46
Tire sidewall labeling..................................................8-49
Tire traction ................................................................8-49
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................8-47
Wheel replacement ....................................................8-49
Towing ..........................................................................7-32
Emergency towing ......................................................7-34
Removable towing hook ............................................7-33
Towing service ............................................................7-32
Trailer Towing................................................................6-95
Driving with a trailer ..................................................6-97
Hitches ......................................................................6-96
If you do decide to pull a trailer ..............................6-101
Maintenance when trailer towing ............................6-100
Safety chains ..............................................................6-96
Trailer brakes ............................................................6-96
Trip modes (Trip computer) ..........................................4-84
A/V Mode ..................................................................4-88
Digital speedometer ....................................................4-87
I 9
Index
Fuel Economy ............................................................4-84
LDWS Mode ..............................................................4-88
One time driving information mode ..........................4-87
Trip A/B ......................................................................4-86
Trip Modes..................................................................4-84
Turn By Turn Mode ....................................................4-88
Warning Messages ......................................................4-89
V
Vehicle break-in process ..................................................1-6
Vehicle certification label ..............................................9-10
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ............1-7
Vehicle handling instructions ..........................................1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ............................9-10
Vehicle load limit ........................................................6-103
Certification label......................................................6-107
Tire and loading information label ..........................6-103
Vehicle weight ............................................................6-108
W
Warning and indicator lights..........................................4-97
Indicator Lights ........................................................4-104
Warning lights ............................................................4-97
Washer fluid ..................................................................8-32
Checking the washer fluid level..................................8-32
I 10
Welcome system ..........................................................4-133
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function......................4-133
Interior light ............................................................4-133
Pocket lamp ..............................................................4-133
Windows ........................................................................4-38
Power windows ..........................................................4-39
Windshield defrosting and defogging..........................4-157
Automatic climate control system ............................4-158
Defogging logic ........................................................4-159
Manual climate control system ................................4-157
Winter driving ................................................................6-92
Carry emergency equipment ......................................6-94
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary ................6-93
Check battery and cables ............................................6-93
Check spark plugs and ignition system ......................6-93
Don’t let your parking brake freeze............................6-94
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath ..........6-94
Snowy or icy conditions ............................................6-92
To keep locks from freezing ......................................6-93
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system..6-93
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant ..................6-93
Wiper blades ..................................................................8-38
Blade inspection..........................................................8-38
Blade replacement ......................................................8-38
Wipers and washers ....................................................4-126
Front windshield washers ........................................4-127
Rear window wiper and washer switch ....................4-128
Windshield wipers ..................................................4-126
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement